JP2020025761A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase development efficiency.SOLUTION: Control means (performance control device 300) for controlling a game includes arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers and storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to control. In a relationship where one control process is called corresponding to a call instruction to be executed in another control process, when one control process stores a return value to be returned to another control process in the register, the return value is stored according to an order predetermined for each of the plurality of registers. When there are return values equal to or more than a predetermined number, the return values up to the predetermined number are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order, and the return values equal to or more than the predetermined number are stored in storage means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 109

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art There has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a game value is given to a player when a result of the game is a special result. In such a gaming machine, the progress of the game is controlled by sequentially performing control processing in a control device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-110126

  In the control device, it is necessary to perform various control processes, and in the development stage, it is necessary to efficiently create these control processes within a limited period. It is an object of the present invention to increase the efficiency of development.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
A control unit for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Arithmetic processing means having a plurality of registers;
Storage means capable of storing information related to control,
When one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed in another control process, a return value returned by the one control process to the other control process is stored in the register. In this case, storing the return value according to a predetermined order in each of the plurality of registers,
When there are a predetermined number or more of the return values, the return values of up to the predetermined number are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order, and the return values of the predetermined number or more are stored in the storage unit. It is characterized by the following.

  According to the present invention, development efficiency can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure explaining a display in a performance display. It is a flowchart explaining a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure suspension information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process and a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the time reduction change frequency update process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 changing process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 1 and the big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a normal figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte data acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining 1 byte subtraction processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1 byte addition processing. It is a flowchart explaining an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a fanfare / interval. It is a figure showing an example of the data structure of ROM which a game control device has. It is a figure explaining a big hit judgment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of the effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a jackpot system command process. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the setting history calendar displayed at the time of changing or confirming a probability set value, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a hole setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining an example of an ending effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an example of setting suggestion effect determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining an example of a fluctuation effect setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the modification of an ending effect setting process. It is a figure showing the modification of a hall setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st modification of setting suggestion effect determination processing. It is a figure showing an example of a setting history calendar displayed as a setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd modification of setting suggestion effect determination processing. It is a figure explaining a (a) hall setting screen and (b) a player setting screen. It is a flowchart explaining a hall setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall sound volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a hall LED brightness adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a player setting mode process. It is a flowchart explaining a player volume adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a player LED brightness adjustment process. It is a flowchart explaining a minus update process. It is a flowchart explaining a plus update process. 7 is a program list showing a program structure of a special figure 1 game process. 3 is a program list showing a program structure of a special figure 2 game process. 9 is a program list showing a program structure of a fanfare / interval processing. It is a program list showing a program structure of a general-purpose game process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of the process during normal figure display. 9 is a program list showing a program structure of a 2-byte data acquisition process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of symbol fluctuation control processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of 1 byte subtraction processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of 1 byte addition processing. It is a program list showing the program structure of the production command setting process. 7 is a program list showing a program structure of processing during special figure 1 display. 9 is a program list showing a program structure of processing during special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the register structure of an effect control device. 5 is a program list showing a program structure of a hole setting mode process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of hall volume adjustment processing. It is a program list which shows the program structure of hall LED brightness adjustment processing. 5 is a program list showing a program structure of a player setting mode process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of a player volume adjustment process. It is a program list which shows the program structure of player LED brightness adjustment processing. It is a program list showing a program structure of a minus update process. It is a program list showing the program structure of plus update processing. 4 is a program list showing a program structure of random number processing. 9 is a program list showing a program structure of a range correction process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between control processes. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between control processes. It is a figure explaining an example of the specific effect in the 1st modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing in a first modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific effect processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the specific effect in the 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining hall setting mode processing in the 2nd modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a custom setting process in a second modification. It is a flowchart explaining the player setting mode process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the player custom setting process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the specific effect processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the (a) custom setting screen and the (b) player custom setting screen in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the specific effect in the 2nd modification. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between control processes in a second modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the specific effect in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining another example of the specific effect processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining adjustment of volume and brightness in a 2nd modification, and an execution mode of a specific effect.

<First embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are built in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce effects, and notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps or LEDs are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). ), A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the contents of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

An upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are provided below the front frame 12. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from a player is provided. A touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from a player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25. However, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge operation that is performed to discharge a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hit ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front of the game board 30. I do. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like in which the operation of the player is interposed is performed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body 80 serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 on the front surface of the game board main body 80. Game area 32 is provided. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a hit ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, a windmill, an obstruction nail, or the like is provided as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At a substantially center of the game area 32, a center case 40 forming a window serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind a window formed in the center case 40.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a CRT (CRT). A still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image in an area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area). For example, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) Information about the game, such as a background image that enhances the effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding a game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path is rolled. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage section 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36, the game balls rolled on the stage section 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
In addition, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided on an upper portion of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (ordinary symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the general-purpose starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided. When a game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34, a general-purpose variation display game is executed.

  In the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, two general winning openings 35 are arranged, and in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, one general winning opening 35 is arranged. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a provided in the general winning opening 35 (see FIG. 3).

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port 36 (first start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected by the start port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for a player) in which a game ball cannot normally flow. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general state solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device is used to open the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 (game). Condition that is advantageous to the person).

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a so-called Vero type normal electric accessory which opens and closes by moving forward and backward (sliding) by the general-purpose solenoid 37c. 37 movable members are not limited to this. The movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory which is opened by being rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by a general-purpose solenoid 37c, or may be a general-purpose solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in a reverse “C” shape.
In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 may enable a game ball to win even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state where the game ball is less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the ordinary figure starting gate 34 and the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37, a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A convertible first special variable prize winning device (upper prize) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper winning prize port into a state in which game balls can flow in by opening and closing members (not shown) advance and retreat (slide) in the front-rear direction. The first special fluctuation winning device 38 changes the upper winning hole from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the upper winning hole. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3).

  Inside the upper winning prize port (winning area), a specific area into which the game ball can flow is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 3) is changed so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area. ) Is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3) capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous state for the player is established. (In the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special game state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special fluctuation winning device 38.

  Further, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area is provided inside the upper winning a prize port. ing. The number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a provided inside the upper winning opening (the number of game balls flowing into the upper winning opening) and the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging switch 38e are detected. The number of game balls (the number of game balls ejected from the upper winning prize port) matches, and it can be confirmed that all game balls in the upper prize winning port have been ejected. Basically, until this check is completed Will not open a new Kamikaze winning opening.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, to the right of the starting winning opening 36, a second special variable winning which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure varying display game. A device (lower prize winning port) 39 is provided. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts a lower winning prize port into a state in which game balls can flow in by opening and closing (not shown) advancing and retracting (sliding) in the front-rear direction. The second special fluctuation winning device 39 changes the lower special winning opening from the closed state to the open state based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the lower special winning opening. A predetermined game value (prize ball) is provided to the player. A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 3).

  The game area 32 below the start winning port 36 is provided with an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won the winning port or the like. Further, a special figure change display game (a special figure 1 change display game, a special figure 2 change display game) and a normal figure change display game are executed outside the game area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 80. A batch display device 50 is provided.

  The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure change display unit) 51 and a special figure 2 change display for a special figure 1 change display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A special figure 2 display (second special figure change display section) 52 for the game, a first storage display section 53 for notifying the number of start storage of the special figure 1 change display game constituted by an LED lamp, and an LED lamp And a second storage display unit 54 for notifying the number of stored starts of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 has a round display portion 55 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed). A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to hit (how to hit corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for informing the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure change display game are provided. I have. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display section for displaying that the large hit probability state is in the high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a display for turning on when a large hit occurs to notify the large hit occurrence. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
Further, a general-figure display section 58 for displaying the general-figure variation display game, a storage display section 59 for notifying the number of stored start-ups of the general-figure variation display game, A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

  The special figure change display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the change display game, that is, while performing the decoration special figure change display game on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 change display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink in addition to the center segment. It is configured to display that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is "missing", for example, the center segment (the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the missing, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", a game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than a loss result mode as a hit result mode (special result mode).

The first storage and display unit 53 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting storage number = reservation number) out of the winning prize balls to the starting winning opening 36 which is a change start condition of the special figure 1 display 51. , Is displayed by lighting (flashing).
The second storage and display unit 54 determines the number of undigested balls (starting storage number = reservation number) out of the number of prize balls to the ordinary fluctuation prize device 37 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52 by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off and lighting (flashing).
The round display unit 55 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and turns on the LEDs corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. Turn on the light. The round display section 55 may be constituted by a 7-segment display.

The first game state display unit 56 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (at the time of normal beating), all LEDs are turned off, and In the case of a game state in which right-handing is more advantageous to the player than hitting (right-handed), all LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the probability state of the big hit is a low probability state (normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probable state). In this case, all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110 with the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock used as a reference for a random number generation circuit. Oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400, so that they can operate. Is done.

  The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from a 32 V DC voltage. 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. A control signal generator 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100. However, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, You may comprise so that it may be provided on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on the power supply device 400 or a board different from the main board. Is provided, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control device 100 can store and retain information relating to the game, and can resume the game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. Of game information storage and holding means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariably information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, and the like) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  The ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for determining the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory by the CPU 111A. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is set, some of the plurality of display results are already derived and displayed at a stage where they are not yet displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, a state in which any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output the game machines. 10 is controlled overall. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generation circuit for generating random numbers for determining a variation pattern for determining reach and non-reach variable display, including a running time of a variable display game, and a hit random number for determining a hit of a normal map variable display game. And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock for giving an update timing of the random number generation circuit to the CPU 111A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of start storages. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A constitutes a change distribution information obtaining means for obtaining any one change pattern table from among a plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, and displays a prize ball. Control for paying out is performed. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, A winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, a large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and a gate switch in the general figure starting gate 34. 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball outlet switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, an out ball detection switch 32a for detecting all game balls fired in the game area 32 and having finished the game. , And a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0V-5V Interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that converts the positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that a lead wire of a sensor or a proximity switch is incorrectly short-circuited, a sensor or a switch is disconnected from a connector, or a lead wire is cut to be floating. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. Is done. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

  The third input port 124 includes a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal of a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibration of the gaming machine 10, A detection signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 and a detection signal from a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become.

  Further, a signal from a setting key switch 152 for detecting an operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured to be able to turn the setting key from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. . The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that the switch has been turned to the second position. The switch is turned on when the switch is turned to the second position, and is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

  The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value of a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned, and operate these operation units. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure change display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. I have. Here, six “setting 1” to “setting 6” are prepared as probability setting values.

  When selecting the probability setting value, the probability setting value is obtained by turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the RAM initialization switch 112 with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. Is changed to a probability set value change mode in which the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated (pressed) during the probability set value change mode, so that the probability set value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the information on the probability set value while the operation on the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode). In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

By turning on the power of the gaming machine in a state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (the RAM initialization switch 112 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device. A probability set value confirmation mode is displayed in 153 but the probability set value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the probability setting values by numbers 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be any display mode that can recognize the probability set value. Further, the display device may be another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, or may indicate the probability setting value by the lighting mode or emission color of one or more LEDs.

  Also, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are transmitted from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) through the apparatus. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 to assert (change to an effective level) the enable signal CE2. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). A signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), an abnormal payout status signal (a status signal indicating abnormal payout), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided to take in a signal based on the input signal and supply the same to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  The input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are temporarily input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. The reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each of the ports 122, 123, 124, 126 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication route from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the notifying agency (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the trial test apparatus as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. The data signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without passing through the buffer, and the like. I have. The chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the trial shooting test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is provided with a first special winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large for opening the second special variable winning device 39). The operation data of the winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38, and the general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37 are output and currently selected. This port is for outputting display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the probability set value.
The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output section 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal plate 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an on / off drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device that is output from the third output port 135, and is output from a fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the data, and the display data of the performance display device 153 that is output from the second output port 134. Fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving a data signal to generate a drive signal output. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

32 V DC is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138 a in order to drive a solenoid operated at 32 V. In order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V, the fifth driver 138 e is supplied with 5 V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage.
In addition, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line by the second driver 138b outputting 12V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal via the segment line by the third driver 138c outputting the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in the above, and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are provided. Absent.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a, the gate A non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) for detecting a game ball by using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used as the switch 34a. Have been. The glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 and the like include micro switches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the gaming microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and control of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. Note that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of the interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 includes a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 includes an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into the production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and the like are connected to a main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. In addition, even if a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for controlling the drive of the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the state and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 Is provided with a switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the detection signal and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, and drives the motor and the solenoid. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling a VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), a sound source LSI 314, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, a lamp, a motor, and the like are output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  FIG. 5 shows the jackpot probability, the fall probability, the small hit probability, and the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won. The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device (first special result), and the small hit is a special result without the operation of the condition device (second special result). The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is operated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is used. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

The value (probability value) of the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, and the probability value in the low-probability state and the probability value in the high-probability state are respectively The probability values are as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to all of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” as the probability value in the high probability state, but different probability values are set. A value may be assigned. That is, the probability value in the high probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the same probability value is assigned to “setting 1” and “setting 2” as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. It may be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple stages, the number of stages is not limited. Further, the same probability value may be assigned to all of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” as the probability values in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low probability state may not be able to be switched in multiple stages.

In addition, the effect distribution and the like may be different between “setting 1” and “setting 2” having the same probability value in the assigned low probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, and “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, six probability setting values (“setting 1”) for three types of probability values (the probability value in the low probability state and the probability value in the high probability state). To “Setting 6”), for example, three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 1” to “Setting 3”) are assigned to three types of probability values, and the remaining three probability setting values (for example, “Setting 4” to “Setting 6”) may not be used.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in a special game state based on a big hit (first special game state), a game ball flows into a specific area (probable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by a specific area switch 38d. (V passing), the special game state is set to a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and a low probability state is set when a falling lottery performed every time the special figure variable display game is executed is won. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 5B.
Also, regardless of which of the special figure change display game and the special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the special figure 1 change display game and the special figure 2 change display game are not changed. Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and the small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit do not win twice. In the present embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 without being provided in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but is not limited thereto. May be provided in both the special figures 1 and 2. In addition, when the small hit is provided in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the small hit probability may be the same in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be smaller in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. May be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

FIG. 5D shows the jackpot types that can be selected in the special maps 1 and 2 and the distribution probabilities of the respective jackpot types.
There are three types of big hits (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game: 10R certain big hits, 4R certain big hits, and 10R normal big hits. Similarly, there are three types of big hits (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R certain big hits, 4R certain big hits, and 10R normal big hits. These jackpot types are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that a game ball is likely to flow into a specific area (probability operation area) and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the special game state. The normal state indicates that it is unlikely that a game ball will flow into a specific area (probable change operation area) and is unlikely to be in a high probability state (probable change state) after the end of the special game state.
Here, the actual number of rounds refers to the number of rounds for performing opening control such that a winning ball is actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The number of each big hit type is the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of actual rounds + the number of rounds for performing opening control such that the opening time of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is short and no winning ball is actually generated). May be.

Further, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area is lower than the probability changing big hit, but the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area than the normal big hit is higher.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is established is determined by whether or not a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area). If the game ball does not flow into the area, the state does not enter the high probability state. Even if the type of the big hit is normal, the state enters the high probability state when the game ball flows into the specific area.

6 (a) to 6 (c) show the opening modes in each round for each type of big hit. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6 (a), in the 10R probability change jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round and a long opening with a V that opens a specific region (probability change operation region) is performed. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which a game ball has a high possibility of flowing into a specific area (probable operation area). Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 6 (b), in the 4R probability change jackpot, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round and a long opening with a V that opens a specific region (probability operation region) is performed. From the second round to the fourth round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened but the specific region is not released, and the first special variable prize device 38 is released from the fifth round onward. A specific area is short-circuited without V-open. The short opening without V is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball flows into the special winning opening is lower than the long opening without V. In other words, the long opening without V is an opening mode in which a winning ball is actually generated, and the short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning ball is actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 6C, in the 10R normal big hit, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a short circuit with V is opened to open a specific region (probable change operation region). The short opening with V is an opening mode in which there is a possibility that a game ball may flow into a specific area (probable operation area) and the opening is lower than the long opening. Then, in the second and subsequent rounds, a long opening without V for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is only the V-long open and the V-short open performed in the first round that the game ball can flow into the specific area (probable operation area). That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which gaming balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. The specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. The specific round may be a plurality of times, such as the first round and the fifth round.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, in the long open without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) If any of the conditions of ()) is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t12). Thereafter, the upper winning prize opening ball processing time starts (t12), and when the upper prize winning opening ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). ). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, in the long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, at the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area so that game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retracts from the specific area and game balls can flow in. Becomes The state in which the specific area switch 38d is valid is a state in which detection of a game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d is treated as invalid.

  The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 msec has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, when 100 msec has elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that a game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened flows into the specific area.

  When 200 msec has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the lapse of 2700 msec, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and either the openable time of 25000 msec elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. When the condition is satisfied, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). Thereafter, the upper winning prize opening ball processing time starts (t39), and when the upper prize winning opening ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t41). When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  After the second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d is enabled (t36). The second opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, so that the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area. Become. Therefore, when the type of the big hit is certain, the high probability state is almost certainly attained.

  Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined time after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 immediately before closing. It is possible for the game balls to flow into a specific area. Note that the first special variable prize device 38 is closed when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable prize device 38 are processed into the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41), the operation is terminated, and the specific area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the upper ball winning ball processing time. If the discharge is not completed and the discharge is completed before the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge is completed. Is ended, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid.
In addition, the elapse of the openable time or the predetermined number of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the upper ball winning ball processing time. If not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on is completed (t43). With this, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is completed. In this case, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t44) 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

  As shown in FIG. 7C, in the V-short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the V-long opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening ends. The round is ended based on (t54). Since the opening of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 is for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility that the game ball flows into the specific area is low. Therefore, when the big hit type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

  The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching of the specific area switch 38d between valid and invalid perform the same operation as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the upper winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time elapses, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. And the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls have not been ejected by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t62). The state ends, the operation ends, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), 100 m seconds later, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

  In addition, the first special fluctuation prize device 38 for the first opening (t31 to t34) in the long opening with V shown in FIG. 7B and the first special fluctuation in the short opening with V shown in FIG. 7C. The opening of the prize device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an opening time that allows the first special variable prize device 38 to win at least one game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and the openable time of 200 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) If any of the conditions of ()) is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that a predetermined number of winnings, which are the closing conditions, occur. Thereafter, the upper winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing time starts (t72), and when the upper prize winning port remaining ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the last round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

  FIG. 6D shows an open state in the second special game state (the special game state based on the small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small hit fanfare time starts, and when the small hit fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and the openable time of 1600 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, When any one of the nine game balls wins, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed. Thereafter, the small hit remaining ball processing time starts, and when the small hit remaining ball processing time ends, the small hit ending time starts. When the small hit ending time ends, the second special game state ends. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening and closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state. .

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, transition (transition) of a game state by game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram exemplifying a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a first specific game state ST2, and a second specific game state ST3. In addition, other special game states include a first special game state based on a first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on a second special result (small hit), but are omitted here. In each game state, a special figure probability from which a first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, an effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, The main starting area, which is the starting area to be aimed at, the main fluctuation special figure, which is the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be mainly executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are determined.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by left-handing and to aim for a prize in the ordinary variable prize device 37 by right-handing. That is, it is possible to select a starting area to be aimed at by a player's intention. Further, in each game state, the game is designed on the assumption that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player plays the game according to this design. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one special figure variable display game that is determined to be the main in the design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each game state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low, and there is no Toden support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and there is no special figure fluctuation display game or general figure. This is a state in which there is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the figure fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 2 variable display game is to be the irregular change. In the normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the small hit in the normal gaming state ST1. .

  The second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the special figure probability is basically low. However, when a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passing), the state is in a high probability state. In addition, there is a state in which there is a general power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a public figure support, there is also a reduction in the time required to reduce the change time of the special figure change display game or the normal figure change display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a chance mode. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

  In the first specific game state ST2, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general-purpose support for improving the open time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. It is in a state where there is a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the time. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the main starting area is the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal fluctuation winning device 37. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be the main change, and the special figure 1 variable display game is to be the irregular change.

In the present embodiment, the probability (the normal probability) of the hit result of the general-figure variation display game in the state with the general-purpose support is the same probability (normal probability) as the state without the general-purpose support. However, in the state where the public telephone support is provided, it is possible to set the public figure probability to be a higher probability (the normal figure high probability state) than the normal probability (the normal figure low probability state).
In the present embodiment, the state in which there is no ordinary power support means that the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state in which there is ordinary electric support. is there.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is shorter than that in the normal game state ST1, and the right-hand operation is performed to perform the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at. In the special figure 2 variable display game, the probability of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game (in the case of the present embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0), and the small hit is won more than the big hit. Due to the high probability of small hits, small hits occur frequently in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
If the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, the state in which the general power support is provided continues even in the special game state based on the small hit, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a state in which there is no ordinary power support even in a special game state based on the small hit continues. In the special game state based on the small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 6D).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the second specific game state ST3, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-hitting game balls have a normal variable winning. It wins the device 37 and does not flow down to the second special variable winning device 39 disposed below the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur frequently, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, in the special game state based on the small hit, most of the right-hitting game balls have a normal variable winning. Without flowing to the device 37, it flows down to the second special variable prize device 39 disposed below the normal variable prize device 37. Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific gaming state ST2, the small hit occurs frequently and the player's possession ball increases, so that the effect mode is a mode called a small hit RUSH.

  Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 because there is a normal power support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and moreover, the state in which the number of balls held by the player increases due to frequent small hits. This is an advantageous state.

The transition of the gaming state is performed by ending the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result, exhausting the specified number of games, and winning the falling lottery that is the transition lottery to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability change jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and in the first special game state, a game ball flows into a specific area (probable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch. If it is detected at 38d (there is V passing), after the end of the first special game state, the process shifts to the first specific game state ST2. On the other hand, when the probability variable jackpot is derived and enters the first special game state, and when the game ball does not flow into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage) ), The game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the first special game state. In addition, a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and if there is no V passing in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special low probability It shifts to the 2nd specific game state ST3). On the other hand, a normal jackpot is derived to enter the first special game state, and in the case of V passing in the first special game state, after the end of the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) It shifts to the 2nd specific game state ST3).
In the second specific game state ST3, when the special figure change display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, when the player has won the falling lottery in the first specific game state ST2, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. In addition, when there is no distinction between the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. When a big hit (first special result) and a small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when there is no distinction between a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit and a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply referred to as a special game state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the hit ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of directional change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and a general-purpose starting gate 34, a general winning opening 35. The player wins the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the gaming region 32 to play the gaming region. 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of the winning hole won. Is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the starting winning port 36 or the left side of the starting winning port 36 is set. The player can aim for a prize at the arranged general prize port 35, and fires a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), so that the general-purpose starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, the first special fluctuation prize. The device 38, the second special fluctuation winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special fluctuation winning device 39 can be aimed at winning.

  A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided in the general-purpose starting gate 34, and is driven into the game area 32. When the game ball passes through the usual start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, the general figure starting memory number is an upper limit number (for example, four If it is less than ()), the number of ordinary figure start storages is added (+1) and one ordinary figure start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The stored number of the general-purpose starting prize is displayed on the general-purpose reserve display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (hit random value) for determining the result of the general-figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the general-figure start memory. Is to be done.

  Then, when there is a general-figure start memory and the general-figure fluctuation display game can be started, that is, when the general-figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the general-figure fluctuation display game hits, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first map stored in the first place is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine a hit in the first game. Then, a process of starting the normal figure change display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the general-figure variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result mode (general-figure specific result) is derived.

  In addition, the game control device 100 sets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined change time on the general-purpose display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general-purpose change display game. After performing the display during the change in the general figure repeatedly displayed in the order given, a process of displaying the general figure change display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. Note that the general-purpose display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, a number, a symbol, a character pattern, or the like is used as the normal identification information, and after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may comprise.

  When the result of the general-floating display game is a hit, the lighting pattern serving as a special result mode is stopped and displayed on the general-figure display unit 58, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the normal-variation winning device 37. Control for opening for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control execution unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In the case where the result of the general-figure variation display game is out of control, control is performed on the general-figure display unit 58 to display a lighting pattern as a result mode of the out-of-position.

  The winning ball in the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball in the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting port 1 switch 36a and a starting port 2 switch 37a respectively provided therein. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning port 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). At the same time, the second start memory, which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, a big hit random number, a big hit symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as the starting storage information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start memory or the second start memory. The number of the start memories is determined by the first storage display unit 53 (special figure 1 hold display) and the second storage display unit 54 (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50. Are displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decoration special figure start storage display.

  The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display apparatus) based on the first start memory, and performs the special figure 2 display 52 ( The special figure 2 variable display game is performed by the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but during execution of one special figure variable display game, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In this case, the one special figure change display game is ended as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, during the execution of the one special figure change display game, if the other special figure change display game has the second special result (small hit), the one special figure change display game will continue until the end of the special game state based on the small hit. The special figure change display game is interrupted.

  That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 change display game (first special figure change display game) based on the winning of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area). It forms a first execution control means for performing control. Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 performs the special figure 2 variable display game (the second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (the second starting winning area). A second execution control means for performing the execution control is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the fluctuation display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. Jackpot and a first special game state (so-called big hit state). When the result of the special figure change display game is a small hit, a special result mode (small hit result mode) in which the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. Becomes a small hit and a second special game state (so-called small hit state). In other words, the special figure 1 display 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball into the starting winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

  Further, after the big hitting game state (first special game state) is over, the game control device (game control means) 100 sets a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the hit probability is high, It is possible to perform control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed with the support). That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms a specific game state generation means.

  In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, a decorative special figure change in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numerals, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed on the display device 41. The display game is executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. And these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the fluctuation display is performed in accordance with the fluctuation of the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed along with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure fluctuation display game.

  That is, the display variation display game (variable display game) in which the display device 41 variably displays the decoration identification information corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). (A decoration special figure variation display game). Note that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. Further, the special figure change display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of a small hit (the special figure 1 variable display game has a small hit probability of 0), but the special figure 2 variable display game has FIG. 2 A long variation (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game. As a result, in the normal game state, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is temporally inefficient, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at small win in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a special figure 1 variable display game by aiming at the starting winning opening 36 by performing a left-hand shot.
The time for the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, but may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Further, the time of the long fluctuation may be varied according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss or a small hit, a long change of about 10 minutes is selected as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game, If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, a long change of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9, first, a process for inhibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed, and then a stack pointer which is a head address of an area for saving a value of a register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Is performed (step X2). Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order. In step X4, the leading 00h is set. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting a power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the slave control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can be prevented from dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a target of validity determination) of the RAM that is not a target of validity determination (calculation of a checksum). Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). If a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is Wait until is shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the set number of checks. If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON. If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a failure at the time of turning on the power. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup processing and the like are performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the load on control can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (Step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (Step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the standby time is over, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or an EEPROM is permitted (step X10). X11), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used in the present embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13). A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the assumption that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (Step X16). If the value is normal (Step X16; Y), the power outage inspection in the RWM is performed. It is determined whether the value of the area 2 is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed. (Step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

  If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), It is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on based on the state read in X6 (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), a command for a main abnormality error notification for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is issued to the effect control board (effect control) because the RAM is abnormal. (Step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting change flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for reporting a main abnormality error is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the power failure occurred. That is, if the power of the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed, the operation of the game control device 100 stops, and the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (Step X25). Thus, a display as shown in FIG. 13H is performed on the performance display device 153. After that, the ON data of the security signal is output and the OFF data of signals other than the security signal is output (step X26), and the process returns to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27; N), a probability setting change flag is set (step X29). This causes a transition to the probability set value change mode. After that, the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, operates the panel effect device 44, and operates the speakers 19a and 19b based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting. Is output to output a sound indicating that the probability set value is being changed.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. Thereafter, the processing of steps X29 and X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

  If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting change flag is set (step X22; N and step X23). N), whether the setting key switch 152 is on is determined based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N), that is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step X41 to stop the power failure. Perform the process when normal recovery is performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43; Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make means of conversion.

  If the setting key switch 152 is ON (step X35; Y), the flag for checking the probability setting is set (step X36). This causes a transition to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the command for confirming the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command during the probability setting confirmation, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the operation of the panel effect device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b. The notification that the probability set value is being confirmed is output by outputting a voice or the like.

  Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 ms or more, a value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process of the timer interrupt process (step X122) when the mode is the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. It is output in the processing (step X120). Therefore, when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 ms, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 ms, the security signal is output for 128 ms after the mode is switched to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. You. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to a value corresponding to 128 ms. However, since it is necessary to output a security signal for at least 50 ms after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, it is necessary to save a value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, an interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). In step X33, instead of making a determination based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is set. Judgment based on When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34). If no power failure has occurred (step X34; N), the process proceeds to step X33. Returning to step X55, if a power failure has occurred (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 9 and 10) after the power failure is restored, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting the interruption (step X38) is performed. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms) from the process of permitting the interrupt (step X32) to the process of prohibiting the interrupt (steps X38 and X55). . In the timer interrupt process, a probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability setting value, is performed. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a notification end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command, the notification being executed (the notification indicating that the probability set value is being changed or the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed) is ended. .

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting change flag is set (step X40). If the probability setting change flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting check flag is set. Performs a power failure restoration process (step X41) for performing a process of saving an initial value at the time of restoration of a power failure in a region to be initialized (for example, a power failure inspection region, a checksum region, and a region relating to error monitoring). The probability setting checking flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a screen designation command. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the customer is waiting, that is, neither during execution of the special figure change display game nor during the special game state. A command for the customer waiting demo screen is transmitted, otherwise, a command for the recovery screen is transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability count information command or the like is also transmitted.

  On the other hand, if the probability setting change flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1-byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for the performance display (display of the base value and the ratio of the accessory) (the work area and the stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to zero. Therefore, the probability setting change flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44, the stack area and the unused area need not be cleared.

  Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step X45). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of the present embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, a RAM initialization command (customer wait) A demo screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for performing notification of RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. In addition, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect number information command, a support number information command that is information on the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game with ordinary power support, and the like are also transmitted.

  Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to make any setting.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining a hit symbol of a special figure) RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), a random number for determining the hit of the ordinary figure (hit random number), and a random number for determining whether or not to win the falling lottery (falling random number). After saving in a predetermined area (step X48), an interrupt is permitted (step X49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, making it difficult for the player to obtain an unauthorized random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling random number are generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” in which a start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. "Has been adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values in a range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since there is no random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol, there is only one type of hit symbol of the ordinary symbol. May be selected from a plurality of types.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step X50, a process for inhibiting interruption (step X51) is performed, and a performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54). If no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number updating process is performed. Return to (Step X50). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number updating process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition, the initial value random number updating process in step X50 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid the execution of the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt, as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed during the timer interrupt processing, but only within the main processing, there is no problem if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, thereby simplifying the main processing. There is an advantage that it is made.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off (step X59) and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (step X61). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. Thus, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power-off, it is possible to determine whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power-off is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means ), The main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control apparatus when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.
In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C on the basis of the above, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, the interrupt routine is started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 11 is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) are performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), Then, a probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are set based on the output data set in various processes. An output process (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as the lever solenoid 38f and the ordinary solenoid 37c). When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 of the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing the output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no processing of the signal is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (the firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X106) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X107), and a random number update process 2 (step X108) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a and 39a, monitor whether there is a normal signal input, setting the prize ball, front frame and glass. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring errors such as opening of the frame and improper winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). The abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharging port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is This is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the special winning opening switch 38a). When abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.

  On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), a start-up switch monitoring process (step X111) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (eg, a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. Then, the special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the processing related to the general figure variable display game are performed. A segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for performing a general-purpose game process (step X114) to drive a segment LED for displaying a special figure variable display game and displaying various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. An editing process (step X115) is performed.

  Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X116), and a process for checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Fraudulent monitoring process (step X117), which checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X118), and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119). Further, an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (step X120) and a performance display monitor control process for controlling the performance display monitor 153 (step X121) are performed, and the timer interrupt process ends. I do.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. Automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change / confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows a probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this probability setting change / confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (the range of 0 to 5 in the present embodiment) (step X131).
If the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y), the probability setting corresponding to the value of the region for the probability setting value in the RWM (current probability setting value) The value display data is set (step X132), and the probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, the performance display device 153 performs the display as shown in FIGS.
On the other hand, if the value of the region for the probability set value in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131; N), turn-off data is set as the probability set value display data (step X133), and the probability set value display is performed. The data is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (Step X134). As a result, a display as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the performance display device 153 includes four 7-segment displays (seven-segment displays) arranged side by side. During the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, of the four 7-segment displays, the rightmost 7-segment display shows the current probability set value, and the remaining 7-segment display shows “SET”. "".
More specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the current probability setting value is “setting 1”, and as shown in FIG. When “1” is displayed on the segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “1”, the current probability setting value is “setting 2”. As shown, “2” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “2”, the current probability setting value is “Setting 3”. As shown in FIG. 13C, “3” is displayed on the right-most 7-segment display, and when the value of the probability set value area in the RWM is “3”, the current probability set value is “set”. 13 "," 4 "is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13D, and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is" 4 ". , Since the current probability setting value is “setting 5”, “5” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13E, and the probability setting value area in the RWM is displayed. Is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so "6" is displayed on the right-most 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 13 (f). When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the rightmost 7-segment display is turned off as shown in FIG.
For example, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is “0”, the probability setting value display data is “1” in the first digit, “T” in the second digit, and “T” in the third digit. Probability set value display data instructing to display “E” and “S” in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step X135). Note that the initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”.
Next, on data of the security signal is output and off data of signals other than the security signal is output (step X136). In step X136, security data ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has expired. Therefore, the security signal is continuously output during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting confirmation flag is set).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability setting change flag is set (step X137). If the probability setting change flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting check flag is set. Ends the probability setting change / confirmation process. On the other hand, when the probability setting change flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. It is determined whether it is a confirmation process (step X138).

  If it is the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the probability setting change / confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X138; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139). In step X139, when an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected in the immediately preceding input process (step X103), it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112. If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

On the other hand, when there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y), that is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is set to 0 to 0. +1 is updated in the range of 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. The value updated in step X140 (the updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change / confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, “setting 1” to “setting 6” are set for three types of probability values (a probability value in a low probability state and a probability value in a high probability state). However, for example, “setting 1” to “setting 3” may be assigned to three types of probability values (a probability value in a low probability state and a probability value in a high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the region for the probability set value of the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the mode can be shifted to the probability set value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability set value change mode. The probability set value can be changed with.
Since only the pressing operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is possible, it is not possible to distinguish between a transition operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, when the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode) is continued even during the probability set value change mode, that is, the RAM initialization switch When the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability setting value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

  Specifically, in the input process of the timer interrupt process (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input process is off, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input process is turned off. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on, the input process immediately before the power is turned off is the previous input process, and the input process immediately after the power is turned on is the current input process. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is likely to be in the off state. That is, if the transition operation is continued even in the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 in the input process (step X103) in the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. ) Is likely to be detected. Therefore, in this case, if the processing of steps X139 and 140 is performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the shift operation, and The inconvenience that the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is updated may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the processing of step X138 is performed, and the processing of steps X139 and X140 is not performed in the probability setting change / confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on. It shall be. As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has been continued since the power was turned on (that is, the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode). ), The input signal (rising edge) based on the operation (2) is ignored, so that unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is the first gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. (Game control device 100 (RAM 111C)) and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. In response to the operation of the second operation unit during the probability setting value change mode, the transition means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value (value of the probability setting value area in the RWM) stored in the storage means. Change) Setting change means (game control device 100), an operation of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability set value change mode (shift operation), and an operation of the second operation unit for changing the probability set value (Change operation) is the same operation (press operation in the case of the present embodiment), and the setting change unit continues even when the gaming machine is powered on even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the two operation unit.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine is continued even after the transition to the probability set value change mode, the probability set value is not changed during that time, which is not intended. It is possible to prevent a change in the probability set value.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 14 shows the start-up switch monitoring process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process (step X492) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information set when the jackpot random number is obtained based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number obtaining process (step X493).

If the information on the presence of the start opening winning is not set based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Note that, in this case, the information on no start-up winning is set.
On the other hand, if the information on the presence of the start opening winning is set based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (normal game state). (Step X494). Then, when the special figure low probability and no time saving are being performed (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. When the special figure low probability and the time saving are not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process (step X496) is performed.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the right-turn instruction notification command, the right-turn instruction is instructed to instruct the player to make a right-turn by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed is more advantageous to the player, and the player does not win unless left-handed. When a winning is detected, a right-handed instruction is notified.

  Then, a table for setting the information of suspension by the starting port 1 is prepared (step X497), and the common process for the special figure starting port switch (step X498) is performed. Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X499), and a hard random number obtaining process (step X500) is performed to obtain a big hit random number based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether there is a start-up winning information that is set in the case (step X501).

If the winning entry winning information has not been set based on the winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process ends. Note that, in this case, the information on no start-up winning is set.
On the other hand, if the start-up winning information is set based on the winning in the ordinary variable prize device 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the pudden (the ordinary variable prize device 37) is operating, that is, It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step X502). If the normal power is operating (step X502; Y), the process proceeds to step X504. Transition. On the other hand, if the ordinary telephone is not in operation (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the unauthorized unauthorized transmission is occurring (step X503).

  In the determination as to whether or not the irregular fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred when the number of illegal winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and a game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the counted number of illegal winnings is equal to or more than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

  In the case where unauthorized fraud has occurred (step X503; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more. In addition, in the case where the illegal operation of the ordinary telephone is not occurring (step X503; N), a table for setting the information of the holding by the starting port 2 is prepared (step X504), and the common processing of the special figure starting port switch (step X505) is performed. Then, the start-up switch monitoring process ends.

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
FIG. 15 shows the special-process starting port switch common processing (steps X498 and X505) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

In the special process starting port switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is transmitted to the management device external to the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count, which is the number of times the output is performed, is loaded (step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the number of times of starting signal output of the RWM (step X524), and the special figure corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored (starting) It is determined whether the number of stored), that is, the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is looped to 0 by updating +1 and the value after the update is not saved.

  Then, if the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step X525; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. On the other hand, when the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated by +1. (Step X526), the target opening port winning flag is saved (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step X528), and the big random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the big random number storage area of the RWM. (Step X529).

Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Next, a falling lottery random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and saved in a falling lottery random number storage area of the RWM (step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) has been won (step X534). On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting opening 2 (step X534; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X535) and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538), which is a pre-read process, is performed. Next, a start-up switch to be monitored and a decoration special-drawing hold number command corresponding to the special-drawing hold number are prepared (step X539), and an effect command setting process (step X540) is performed. finish.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning port 36, and stores the predetermined random number as a first starting memory to a predetermined upper limit number. A start storage means is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and stores the predetermined random number as a second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. (2) A starting storage means is provided.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
FIGS. 16 and 17 show the special figure hold information determination processing (step X538) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In this special figure reservation information determination processing, first, it is determined whether a big hit is being performed (during the first special game state) (step X541), and if a big hit is being performed (step X541; Y), the special figure reservation information determination is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, when the big hit is not in progress (step X541; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked to win the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36). Is determined (step X542).

  If the winning is to the opening 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 to perform prefetching. On the other hand, when the winning is not made to the starting port 1 (step X542; N), it is determined whether the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (during the normal game state) (step X543). If the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (step X543; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. That is, when the game is in the normal gaming state, a long variation (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, the prefetch is not performed. On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (step X543; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step X544).

  If it is not during the special figure high probability (step X544; N), the process proceeds to step X548. On the other hand, if the special figure high probability is present (step X544; Y), is the value of the falling lottery random number prepared in step X532 of the special figure starting port switch common processing within the range of the falling winning determination value? A determination is made (step X545). Next, a prefetch fall lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), and effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed to prepare a low probability determination flag (step X548).

  Then, a pre-reading big hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit low probability judgment value). If the result of the determination is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X551), and preparation is made in step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number obtained is acquired (step X552), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step X550; N), the starting port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is checked, and the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is checked. (Step X553).

  If it is not the winning opening 2 (step X553; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the process proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, when the winning is to the opening 2 (step X553; Y), a small hit determination process (step X554) for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether the small hit is a small hit. I do. If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X556), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step X557), and the flow proceeds to step X559. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X555; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X558), and the stop symbol information acquired in step X552 or X557, or set in step X558. The stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step X559).

Thereafter, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X560), and effect command setting processing (step X561) is performed.
Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and a look-ahead big-hit determination process (step X563) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit random value matches the big-hit determination value (big-hit high-probability determination value). I do. When the result of the determination is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step X565), and the process proceeds to step X530 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step S566 is acquired (step X566), and the flow proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step X564; N), the starting port winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting port switch common process is checked, and the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is checked. (Step X567).

  If it is not the winning in the starting opening 2 (step X567; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting opening 2 (step X567; Y), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X568). I do. If the result of the determination is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step X570), and the small hit symbol prepared in step X535 of the special figure starting port switch common processing is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is obtained (step X571), and the flow proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a small hit (step X569; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step X572), and it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step X573).

  If it is not during the special figure high probability (step X573; N), the process proceeds to step X575. On the other hand, when the special symbol is in high probability (step X573; Y), the stop symbol information obtained in step X566 or X571 is stored in the symbol information area in which the stop symbol information is saved in step X559, or Then, the stop symbol information set in step S574 is overwritten and saved (step X574). In addition, the stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for pre-reading the variation pattern or the like.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step X575), and effect command setting processing (step X576) is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure suspension information determination process is performed, the result determined using the large hit low probability determination value and the result determined using the large hit high probability determination value are transmitted to the effect control device 300. Is done.
Next, special figure information setting processing (step X577) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting processing for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step X578). I do.
Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step X579), and effect command setting processing (step X580) is performed to determine the special figure suspension information. The process ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step X577 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step X578 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  With the above processing, the look-ahead fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target, and the prefetch stop including the result of the special figure change display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target A symbol command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether the vehicle falls down (whether the big hit probability state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state)) or not, whether the big hit or the small hit, or not. , The type of variation pattern) can be notified to the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and is displayed on the display device 41 in particular. By changing the decoration special figure start storage display to be performed, it is possible to notify the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that can determine the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage unit. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start storage unit before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). It constitutes a preliminary judgment means. In addition, the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning where the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Prefetch big hit determination processing]
FIG. 18 shows the prefetch big hit determination process (steps X549 and X563) in the above-described special figure suspension information determination process. In the pre-reading big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step X581), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step X582). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery has been lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (Step X582; N), it is determined whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (Step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), an upper limit judgment value in high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X584), and the value of the target jackpot random number is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, if the big hit is not a big hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 19 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 interruption flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set (step Y99). The special figure 1 variable display game is executed when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result (small hit) during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second special game state is executed. , During the execution of the second special game state.

  If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y99; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y100, and the subsequent special figure 1 variable display is performed. Performs processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 interruption flag is set (step Y99; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y100 to Y115 is performed. No, the process moves to step Y116. As a result, during the suspension of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game, first, a special game state executed based on whether the special figure 2 is in a big hit or a small hit, that is, based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit It is determined whether it is in the middle (step Y100). If the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 is being performed (step Y100; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103. On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit / small hit in the special map 2 (step Y100; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y101) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. In order to set a special winning opening count command to be monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening, or to close the special winning opening when a specified number of winnings have been made to the special winning opening. Is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning state switch monitoring processing is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit. For a special game state executed based on a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in a special figure 2 game process described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the identification is performed based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). A process for setting an area passage flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

  Next, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step Y103), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y116. If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already expired, the process branches to the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. To this end, first, a special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is prepared in a register (step Y105), a special figure 1 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y106), and a 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (step Y106). Step Y107). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is obtained from the special figure 1 game processing branch table, and a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y108).

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “0” in step Y108, the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the special figure 1 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the special setting are performed. FIG. 1 Special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing the processing during fluctuation is performed.
If the special figure 1 game processing number is “1” in step Y108, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process is performed. The process during one fluctuation (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the type of each big hit The special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is “3” in step Y108, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing to be performed during the fanfare / interval (step Y112) is performed.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, and an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

If the special figure 1 game processing number is "5" in step Y108, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 1 A special winning port remaining ball process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing the jackpot end process is performed.
If the special figure 1 game processing number is “6” in step Y108, the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) I do.

  After that, a special figure 1 change control table for controlling the change of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y116), and a pattern change control process (step Y117) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the lever solenoid is operated. A lever solenoid control process (step Y118) for controlling the operation of 38f is performed, and the special figure 1 game process ends. The special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control for the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIGS. 20 and 21 show the special figure 2 game process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2.

  In the special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is in the special game state executed based on the big hit (step). Y130). Then, when the big hit of the special map 1 is in progress (step Y130; Y), the processing shifts to step Y133. When the big hit of the special map 1 is not in progress (step Y130; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing (step Y131) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring processing (step Y132) is performed.

In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. In order to set a special winning opening count command to be monitored and transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning in the special winning opening, or to close the special winning opening when a specified number of winnings have been made to the special winning opening. Is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, a special winning state switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the identification is performed based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). A process for setting an area passage flag is performed. Processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the setting of the specific area passage flag.

  Next, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y153. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. Is determined (step Y135).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y136), and the length is stored in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. The fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y137), and the flow shifts to step Y153.
In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game in which the small hit occurrence probability is high in the normal game state, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if an upper limit is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (for example, 60000 ms) is measured.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), first, in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number, a special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to Is prepared in a register (step Y138), and the special figure 2 game processing number is loaded and prepared (step Y139), and a 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (step Y140). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is acquired using the special figure 2 game processing branch table, and a subroutine call is performed using the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y141, the start of the change of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the setting of the change start, the effect setting, and the special figure 2 FIG. 2 Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing the fluctuation processing is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” at step Y141, the special figure for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display is performed. A process during two fluctuations (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the type of each big hit type A special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “3” in step Y141, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing, and the like are performed. The processing of the fanfare / interval to be performed (step Y145) is performed.
In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is “4”, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round. A special winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "5" in step Y141, if the big hit round is the last round, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning opening or the special figure 2 A special winning port remaining sphere process (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “6” in step Y141, the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is "7" in step Y141, the opening time / opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hit processing are performed. A small fanfare medium process (step Y149) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y141, the small hitting middle processing (step Y150) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

If the special figure 2 game processing number is “9” in step Y141, the processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hitting processing or the processing for ending the small hitting A small hit remaining ball process (step Y151) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the special figure 2 game processing number is “10” in step Y141, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary processing is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y153), and a pattern fluctuation control process (step Y154) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid is operated. A lever solenoid control process (step Y155) for controlling the operation at 38f is performed, and the special figure 2 game process ends. The special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control for the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above-described special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game processing for the special figure 2. In the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. The corresponding processes will be described in parallel.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 ordinary processing (step Y109) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special map 1 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 1 can be started (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not from the stop of the change of the special figure 2 change display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, to the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 1 ordinary processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

If the special figure 1 cannot be changed (step Y201; N), “0” is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y <b> 217), the special map 1 ordinary processing ends. In addition, when the variation of the special figure 1 can be started (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been notified, that is, whether the left-handing instruction notification flag has been set (step Y202).
If the left-handing instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handing instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-handing instruction notifying command is prepared (step Y203), an effect command setting process (step Y204) is performed, and the left-handing instruction notifying flag is set. (Step Y205). The left-turn instruction notification flag is cleared when the specific game state ends, so that the left-turn instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206), and if the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and effect command setting processing (step Y208) is performed. . Thereafter, a special figure 1 change start process (step Y209) for setting information related to the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y210). ), And effect command setting processing (step Y211). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 reservation is not performed. A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. After that, a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

  Next, the special figure status change area is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y214). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure change display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed, and the special figure status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 change display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting processing (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 ordinary processing ends.

[Special Figure 2 Normal Processing]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 ordinary processing (step Y142) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special map 2 usual processing, first, it is determined whether the change of the special map 2 can be started (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to change in this determination means that the state is not between the stop of the change of the special figure 1 change display game which becomes a big hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that, while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state in which the fluctuation cannot be started, in this case, the special figure 2 is not in the normal processing. Here, this need not be determined.

  If the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239) Tokuzu 2 usual processing ends. In addition, when the special figure 2 can be started to change (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special figure 2 is 0 (step Y222).

  If the number of reserved special figure 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and effect command setting processing (step Y224) is performed. . Thereafter, a special figure 2 change start process (step Y225) for setting information relating to the special figure 2 change display game is performed, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226). ), And effect command setting processing (step Y227). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command (step Y226), the special figure 2 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not subtracted, and the current special figure 2 reservation is not performed. A reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number obtained by subtracting -1 from the number is prepared. Thereafter, a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

  Next, the state of the special figure 2 being changed is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y230). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting processing (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 ordinary processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y232). Then, if the number of reserved special figure 1 is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233). If the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y234). If not (step Y234; N), the customer waiting demo is not started. Performs processing related to state setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y232; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y233; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234; Y). Shifts to step Y238.

  In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236). A command setting process (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demonstration command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the game state, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate effect, but By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, from the reception of this command, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, a change start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure change display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). This makes it possible for the effect control device 300 to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. Thus, it is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration command and the change start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the gaming state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
FIG. 24A shows the special figure 1 change start processing (step Y209) in the above-described special figure 1 ordinary processing. The special figure 1 change start processing is a processing performed at the start of the special figure 1 change display game. In the special figure 1 change start processing, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of a change pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing is set (step Y241). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM (step Y242), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y243), a falling lottery process (Step Y244) for performing a lottery transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1).

  Next, a big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting outfall information or big hit information as result information of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) is performed. A symbol setting process (step Y246) is performed. Then, a special figure 1 information setting process (step Y247) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to refer to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. A special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the above information is set, is prepared (step Y248).

  Thereafter, a special figure 1 change pattern setting process (step Y249) for setting a change pattern that is a change mode in the special figure 1 change display game is performed, and a change start information setting for setting information on a change start of the special figure 1 change display game is performed. The processing (step Y250) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation count updating processing (step Y251) is performed. Next, "1" for the special figure 1 changing process is set as the processing number (step Y252), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is stored in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (step Y256). Here, 100 ms is saved (step Y257), and the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y258), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed. To end.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 24B shows the special figure 2 change start processing (step Y225) in the above-described special figure 2 ordinary processing. The special figure 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 change display game. In this special figure 2 change start processing, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag used for distribution of a change pattern in the special figure reservation information determination processing is set (step Y261). Next, a random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM (step Y262), and the special figure 2 falling lottery random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step Y263), a falling lottery process (Step Y264) for performing a lottery transition from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed. The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the first of special figures 2).

  Next, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting miss information, big hit information or small hit information as result information of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y266) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to refer to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the above information is set, is prepared (step Y268).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y269) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. The processing (step Y270) is performed, and the time reduction fluctuation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. Next, "1" relating to the special figure 2 changing process is set as the process number (step Y272), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step Y273).

  Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of the change of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). Then, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), and the initial value of the blink control timer (the timer of the blink cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is stored in the special figure 2 blink control timer area (step Y276). Here, 100 ms is saved (step Y277), and the initial value (here, “0” indicating a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 2 change (step Y278), and special figure 2 change start processing is performed. To end.

  In the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing, when a change pattern of the special figure change display game is selected, information on the set probability set value may be referred to. This makes it possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies a probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value, or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 25 shows a falling lottery process (steps Y244 and Y264) performed in the special figure 1 change start processing and the special figure 2 change start processing. In the falling lottery process, first, it is determined whether the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y581; N), the falling lottery processing is ended. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582). Note that to win the falling lottery means that the falling lottery random number matches the falling lottery determination value. The falling lottery determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the falling lottery random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit value of the falling lottery determination value, which is the lower limit value of the falling lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the falling lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value, it is determined that the lottery has been won.

If the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (step Y582; Y), that is, if the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (Step Y582; N), it is determined whether the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (Step Y583).
If the value of the falling lottery random number is greater than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the falling lottery has not been won, the falling lottery process ends. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the value of the falling lottery random number is not larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, processing for shifting to the low probability state is performed.

In the process for shifting to the low probability state, first, a signal relating to the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON, and four big hit signals are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y586), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y587). Thereafter, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and the falling lottery process ends. As a result, the state becomes the low probability state and the state without the ordinary power support, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the ordinary power support is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs processing such as changing the effect mode based on the information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 26A shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM and prepared (step Y282), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y282). Step Y283).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 as a result of the big hit determination of the running special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y), the big hit flag 1 is set. The process ends. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are prevented from being a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step Y281 (step Y285). Y287), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y285) is not a jackpot (step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 26B shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a jackpot random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) of the RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y293). Step Y294).

Thereafter, the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination in the running of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined to be a jackpot (step Y295). I do. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not set to a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big random number value matches the big hit determination value.
If the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the outlier information was saved in step Y292 (step Y292). Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is not a jackpot (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is equal to the jackpot determination value to determine whether the jackpot is a small jackpot. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
If the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information has been saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination process]
FIG. 27 shows the big hit determination processing (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the player has lost the lottery of the big hit. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the special figure high probability is present (step Y313).

  When the special figure is in the high probability (step Y313; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y314), and the value of the target jackpot random number is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is larger than the determination value (step Y316). If the special figure is not in the high probability (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step Y315), and the value of the target big hit random number is determined in the upper limit determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step Y316).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, when the big hit is not a big hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
FIG. 28 shows the small hit determination process (step Y299) in the above-described big hit flag 2 setting process. In the small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). The small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit determination value that is the lower limit value of the small hit determination value and equal to or less than the upper limit determination value that is the upper limit value of the small hit determination value. In some cases, a small hit is determined. Also, the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, an outlier is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery has been lost. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y322).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment processing ends. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, when it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y324), and the small hit judgment processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step Y246) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y334). By this processing, the type of big hit is selected. The reason why the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), and the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained to obtain the special figure 1 round number. It saves in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquires the special winning opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 large winning opening information area (step Y339), and proceeds to step Y340. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set. After that, an effect command setting process (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decorative special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343). One stop symbol setting processing ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 30 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step Y266) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. The special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is the same as the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process for the special symbol 2. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations 1) ) Is loaded with a jackpot symbol random number (step Y362). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y364). By this processing, the type of big hit is selected. Note that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because the result may be forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special figure display (here, the special figure 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), and the upper limit information on the number of rounds corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and the number of special figure 2 rounds is obtained. It saves in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquires the special winning opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 large winning opening information area (step Y369), and proceeds to step Y370. . These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and if it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step Y376). Next, a special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y377), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol save area (step Y378). The small hit type is selected by this processing. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y379), and the process proceeds to step Y370.

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y380), and the loss stop symbol pattern is specified. It saves in the 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372), and the special hit 2 large hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y373). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y374), and the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) in the first variable display game. Is a first determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, based on the second start memory stored in the second start storage means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the second change display game (the special figure 2 change display game) in the second change display game. A second determining means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the start winning port 36 is provided at a position where a game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win a prize, and the normal variable prize device 37 is provided with a game ball fired on the other side of the game area 32. Is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information on a variable time capable of specifying the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination is performed in the normal state (normal game state). The change time that can be determined as the change time of the second variable display game by the means is longer than the change time that can be determined as the change time of the first variable display game by the first determination means. Become.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on a pattern is exemplified. By transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (the special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determining unit. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game process.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variable display game execution control unit capable of controlling the execution of the second variable display game (the special figure 2 variable display game) based on the determination result of the second determining unit. . In addition, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game process.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and the variation mode information of the first variable display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game determined by the second determination unit as control information. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game in response to the start of the variation display game, and when the measurement time has elapsed the variation time. It forms a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, a long change is set with a very long change time. In this case, information on the change time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long change is not performed. May be transmitted. In the case of a long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on receiving the stop command. To do. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the effect control device 300.

[Special figure 1 information setting processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 1 information setting processing (step Y247) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. In the special figure 1 information setting processing, first, a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are obtained (step Y402). It is determined whether the FIG. 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y403). If it is the special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

  If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.

After that, the latter half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405), and the special figure 1 information setting processing ends. Thereby, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 1 change display game, in the case of a loss, only the first half change pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 hold number, and in the case of a big hit, the special figure 1 hold number is considered. The variation pattern is determined.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
FIG. 32 shows the special figure 2 information setting processing (step Y267) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing. In the special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether the special figure is low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step Y421). If the special figure is not low probability and there is no time saving (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time shortening final change (step Y427). Here, if the special figure 2 change display game to be started is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final change.

  If it is the time-reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), the process proceeds to step Y428. If the time variation is not the final variation (step Y427; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired. (Step Y424), and proceeds to step Y425.

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is being performed (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the high probability final fluctuation (step Y427). In this case, when a falling lottery for the special figure 2 change display game to be started is won, it is determined that the change is a high probability final change.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), the first-half offset data and the second-half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and the process proceeds to step Y425.
If it is not the high-probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y429). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y429; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 at low probability is set (step Y430), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. Is set (Step Y432), and the routine goes to Step Y425.

  If it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length change is set. (Step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.

Thereafter, the latter half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426), and the special figure 2 information setting processing is ended. Thereby, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
As described above, in the special figure 2 change display game, the change pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 33 shows the special figure 1 change pattern setting processing (step Y249) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing. The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y452). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 1 to prepare it (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a non-stop symbol pattern (step Y454). )I do. If the special figure 1 is not out of position (step Y454; N), a distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between the hit and non-hit types. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving data capacity, the size of the hit is 1 byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of misses is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and the size of the misses is 2 bytes in order to enable more diverse effects.

  Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of Toku-zu 1 (Step Y458). Next, a distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the second-half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is obtained and saved in the second-half variation number area (step Y460). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second variation number determined as the variation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y464).
After that, a distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained and saved in the first variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y269) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step Y471), and an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step Y472). The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 to prepare it (step Y473).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a loss stop pattern (step Y474). If the special figure 2 is off (step Y474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step Y475) )I do. If the special figure 2 is not out of position (step Y474; N), a sorting process (step Y476) is performed.

  Then, the address of the second-half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (step Y477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of Toku-zu 2. (Step Y478). Next, a distribution process (step Y479) is performed, a second-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second-half variation number area (step Y480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second variation number (step Y482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step Y483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) of FIG. Prepare (step Y484).
After that, the distribution process (step Y485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now is set.

[Change start information setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y250 and Y270) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. In this change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas (for the number of hold 1) of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step Y551). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y552), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y555). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y557).

  In the special figure 2 change display game in the normal game state, a long change with a very long change time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 msec) excluding the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60000 msec), is the added value Is calculated as

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558). If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in the normal gaming state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

  If the long change of the special figure 2 is not started (step Y559; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y560). If it is the start of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y563), and the effect command setting process (step Y564) is performed. Do. Next, the hold number of the target is updated by -1 (step Y566), the contents of the target random number storage area are shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the change start information is set. The process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the number of repetitions is set in the long variation of the special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not sufficient with the 2-byte timer. In the variation start information setting process, the timer of 60000 msec and the number of repetitions of 9 are saved as an addition result, and the timer is decremented by the timer interrupt process. Set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is 10 minutes (= 60000 msec × 10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds in 2 bytes, but it is expressed in a form of multiplication of 60 seconds for easy understanding.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
FIG. 36 shows the time shortening change frequency update processing (steps Y251 and Y271) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing. In the time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure is in the high probability state (during the high probability state) (step Y571), and if the special figure is in the high probability state (step Y571; Y), the time is determined. The process of updating the number of times of shortened fluctuation is ended. If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step Y571; N), it is determined whether the special figure time reduction is in progress (step Y572). Then, if the special figure time is not working (step Y572; N), the time reduction variation number update processing is ended. If the special figure time is being reduced (step Y572; Y), the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the number of times of time shortening change is "0" (step Y574). .

If the number of times of time reduction fluctuation is not “0” (step A754; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update processing is ended. If the number of times of the time shortening change becomes "0" (step Y574; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time saving (for example, two big hits are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575). , A signal relating to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 is opened longer. The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y577), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578), and the ordinary figure game mode flag area is saved. Then, the flag for saving time-saving is not saved (step Y579), and the time-reduction variation count updating process ends.

[Processing during special figure 1 fluctuation]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y110) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y621). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the stop may be forcibly stopped before the change time set at the start of the change. Therefore, when the change is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. . Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In the present embodiment, for example, a display time of 600 msec is set for a loss, and a display time of 2000 msec is set for a big hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of place, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y627; Y), the flow shifts to step Y642. If the special figure 1 is not out of the way (step Y627; N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y628). Whether or not the special figure 2 change display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the flow shifts to step Y639. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is in progress (step Y629). That is, in this case, the running of the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y639; Y), the flow shifts to step Y631. If the special figure 2 is not being displayed (step Y629; N), the number of times of design confirmation output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the display time of the special figure 1 set as above is set as the display time of the special figure 2. A display time of display time + 4 ms is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 plus the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. The display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the time of the stop display is extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and effect command setting processing (step Y635) is performed. Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y636), an effect command setting process (step Y638) is performed, and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y639), and information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area. (Step Y640) The information is loaded from the special figure 1 special winning opening information area and saved in the special winning opening information area (step Y641). After that, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), and the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting processing 1 (step Y643) is performed. The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y143) in the above-described special figure 2 game process. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by +1 (step Y651). Then, a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 ms for a miss, 600 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y657; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If the special figure 2 is not out of the way (step Y657; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y658). Whether the special figure 1 change display game is running or not can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  If the special figure 1 change display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the flow shifts to step Y673. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit is reached, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y659; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decorative special figure 1 is interrupted. The command is prepared (step Y671), the effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and the flow shifts to step Y673.

  In other words, in this case, the running of the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the small figure winning of the special figure 2 variable display game. It should be noted that a case where the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped as a result of a loss based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already completed the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not been completed, the forced stop is also performed.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. If the special figure 1 is not being displayed (step Y660; N), the number of times of outputting the symbol confirmation number is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the display time of the special figure 2 set as above is set as the display time of the special figure 1. A display time of display time + 4 ms is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of the special figure 2 plus the display time of 4 msec as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be ended simultaneously. The display time is reset even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already being displayed, and a new display time is started. By this resetting, the time of the stop display is extended, but may be shortened in some cases.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 off symbol command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the design command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and effect command setting processing (step Y666) is performed. After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing (step Y668) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step Y669) is performed.

  Then, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y673), and the special figure 2 small hit is determined, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit. A determination is made (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the flow shifts to step Y677. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y674). Y675), the information is loaded from the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y676). After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), and the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 2 display (step Y678) is performed. The displaying process ends.

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the above-described special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 display processing, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step Y751), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared. (Step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753), and if the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the special figure 1 variable display game is performed. A test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON and the special symbol 1 signal ON) for the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754).

Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y755), and effect command setting processing (step Y756) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y760), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y764) is performed, and the special figure 1 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special map 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, if the big hit flag 1 is outlier information, it is determined whether or not it is a high probability final change (step Y765). In step Y765; N), it is determined whether or not it is a time reduction final change (step Y766). In this case, when the falling lottery for the running special figure 1 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. Further, when the special figure 1 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; N) and if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y765; Y) or a time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and the production command A setting process (step Y768) is performed. Next, the probability status command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y769), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y770). It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a small hit (step Y771).

  If the small hit in the special map 2 is in progress (step Y771; Y), the flow shifts to step Y774. On the other hand, when the small hit in the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y771; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is displayed. Thereafter, the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y774), and the special figure 1 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). The displaying process ends.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
40 and 41 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 displaying process is the same as the special figure 1 displaying process described above, except that the special figure 2 is displayed. In this special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 change start processing is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815). If the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. A test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) concerning the start of the big hit (Special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the design command area to prepare (step Y817), and effect command setting processing (step Y818) is performed. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the special winning opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a big hit in the special figure change display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of the present embodiment, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the state of the probability.

  After that, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y822), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y826) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special map 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is the outlier information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). . If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y827; Y), it is determined whether the change is a high probability final change (step Y828). If the small hit flag 2 is not a high probability final change (step Y828; N), the time is determined. It is determined whether it is the shortened final fluctuation (step Y829). In this case, if the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. In addition, when the special figure 2 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; N) and if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y829; N), the process moves to step Y834. In the case of a high-probability final fluctuation (step Y828; Y) or a time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and the production command A setting process (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y832), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, a large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small hit. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, commands are loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y834), and effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal related to the right strike instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838). Here, it is set so that the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided.
Thereafter, the lower winning award opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y840), and the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y841). The transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and the processing for displaying the special figure 2 ends.

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether the change is a high probability final change (step Y843). If the small hit flag 2 is not a high probability final change (step Y843; N), the time is shortened. It is determined whether it is the final fluctuation (step Y844). In this case, if the falling lottery for the running special figure 2 change display game is won, it is determined that the change is the high probability final change. In addition, when the special figure 2 change display game being executed is the 100th (number of times of support) special figure change display game from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time shortening final change.

  If it is not the high-probability final fluctuation (step Y843; N) or if it is not the time-reduction final fluctuation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In the case of the high probability final fluctuation (step Y843; Y) or the time shortening final fluctuation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and the production command A setting process (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y847), and a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided. Thereafter, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y850), and the special figure 2 usual processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851). The displaying process ends.

  That is, based on the fact that the variable display game has the first special result, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the activation of the condition device. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state for opening the special variable winning device without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result. Eggplant

[Fanfare / interval processing]
FIGS. 42 and 43 show the fanfare / interval processing (steps Y112 and Y145) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the fanfare / interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y939; N), the fanfare / interval processing ends. On the other hand, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y939; Y), it is determined whether or not the round is the first round (step Y940).

  If it is not the first round (step Y940; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y940; Y), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the general-purpose starting gate 34 (step Y941). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started when the gaming ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure change display game. I have. The start condition of the special game state may be satisfied by passing the game ball through a gate provided separately from the general-purpose starting gate 34.

  If the game ball has not passed to the ordinary figure starting gate 34 (step Y941; N), the processing during the fanfare / interval ends. On the other hand, when the game ball has passed to the ordinary figure starting gate 34 (step Y941; Y), a round number upper limit value table is prepared (step Y942), and the round number upper limit information is loaded and prepared. (Step Y943), a 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (Step Y944). The acquired upper limit of the number of rounds (10 in the present embodiment) is saved in the upper limit of the number of rounds (step Y945). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the acquired round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

  Next, the upper winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y947), and the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning prize opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950). Then, a special winning opening opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

  Next, the jackpot medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot medium processing control pointer area (step Y954). The special opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). When the opening and closing are repeated in one round, 0 is set as the initial value of the big hit processing control pointer. In the present embodiment, long opening with V is equivalent. When one opening is performed in one round, a big hit operation end value (2 in the present embodiment) is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever member is operated by operating the lever solenoid 38f, and in the case of the present embodiment, only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N), stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

  Thereafter, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not the big hit of the special figure 1 has been reached (step Y960). If the big hit is the special figure 1 (step Y960; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y961), and the special winning opening opening time is set in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. (Step Y962). On the other hand, if the special hit is not the special hit (step Y960; N), that is, if the special hit is the special hit 2, the process number is saved in the special process 2 game process number area (step Y963), and the special winning opening is opened. The time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

  Then, a signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y965). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Next, in order to open the opening / closing member of the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The large winning opening count is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (the first special gaming state), only the upper winning prize port (the first special fluctuation device 38) is opened, In the special game state based on the hit (the second special game state), only the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but not limited to this. For example, the opening and closing mode in the first special game state may be such that the upper winning opening is opened in the first round, and the lower winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 big hit end processing (step Y115) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing. In the special figure 1 big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction in step Y1101, the big hit end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed. If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction in step Y1101, the big hit end setting processing 2 (step Y1101) Step Y1103) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In the present embodiment, a specific area passage flag is set when a game ball flows into a specific area (probable change operation area), and when this specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. . If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), the big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probably changing operation area) in the special game state based on the normal big hit (in the present embodiment, 10R normal big hit) is loaded. (Step Y1107).

  When it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), the process proceeds to step Y1109. On the other hand, if it is a specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; Y), an effect command setting process (step Y1109) is performed by adding irregular probability change information to the probability information command (step Y1108). By the processing in step Y1109, the probability information command is transmitted to effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction”, “low probability / with time reduction”, and “low probability / without time reduction” are included. Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the irregular operation area, irregular irregularity information is added.

  Next, “0” related to the special figure 1 ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step Y1110), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award winning illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1115), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Then, the special figure 2 game wait time value (for example, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

By performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, the special figure change display game can be started for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the special figure 2 variable display game is started by the processing of starting the special figure variable display game in the special figure 2 game processing by the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Can be started first. Therefore, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, so that the start processing for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, after the game control device 100 finishes the special game state, the second variable display game execution control unit executes the second variable display game execution control unit until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game. A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the two-variation display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. The special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that the step Y1109 in the special figure 1 big hit processing is not performed. In the special figure 2 big hit end processing, first, a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data is performed (step Y1131). If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is no time reduction in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 1 (step Y1132) is performed. If the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction in step Y1131, the big hit end setting process 2 ( Step Y1133) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134). If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), the big hit end setting process 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, a probability information command is loaded from the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and a game ball to a specific area (probable operation area) in a special game state based on a normal big hit (in the present embodiment, 10R normal big hit) is loaded. (Step Y1137).

  If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), the flow shifts to step Y1139. On the other hand, when it is the specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; Y), the irregularity probability change information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138), and the effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. By the process in step Y1139, the probability information command is transmitted to effect control device 300. As the probability information command transmitted here, a plurality of commands including information on the effect mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction”, “low probability / with time reduction”, and “low probability / without time reduction” are included. Yes, in the case of irregular passage in the irregular operation area, irregular irregularity information is added.

  Next, “0” relating to the usual processing of the special figure 2 is set as the processing number (step Y1140), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143). Here, one big hit signal and three big hit signals are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

  Next, the number for turning off the light is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the upper winning award winning illegal monitoring period flag area (step Y1145), and the special figure status area is cleared. (Step Y1146), the special figure 2 big hit end processing ends. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 46A shows the big hit end setting process 1 (steps Y1102 and 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, no output is made only for the data setting.

Next, a signal relating to the start without time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a normal electric accessory 1 Set the open extension status signal to OFF.
Thereafter, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1153), and the no-figure time-saving flag is saved in the general-figure game mode flag area (step Y1154). Next, the special figure low probability and no time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is set to 0. Clear (step Y1156).

  Next, a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display unit 56 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handing is provided. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the big hit end setting process 1 ends. By this processing, the normal game state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 46B shows the big hit end setting process 2 (steps Y1103 and 1133) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of the working hours is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a normal electric accessory 1. Set the open extension status signal to ON.
Thereafter, the number with the time reduction is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1163), and the flag with the time reduction is stored in the general-purpose game mode flag area (step Y1164). Next, the special figure low probability and time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and the time reduction fluctuation number area for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time reduction state is initialized. The value is saved (step Y1166). In the case of this embodiment, since the number of times of support is 100, 100 is saved as an initial value in step Y1166.

  Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. By this processing, a special game low probability second specific game state is set. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handing mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handing mode is set during the big hit, the setting related to the right-handing is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (steps Y1105 and Y1135) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In the big hit end setting process 3, first, a signal relating to the start of special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1171). Here, two big hit signals are set to ON. Note that the big hit 2 signal is also ON during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability & time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 change time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 change time reduction state signal are set to ON. Thereafter, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1173), and the special figure high probability and the time reduction flag are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on, and a display for instructing right-hand operation is provided. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power transmission restoration transmission command area (step Y1177), and the big hit end setting process 3 ends. This process results in a high probability state. In other words, by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 1, it becomes the first specific game state, and by executing the big hit end setting process 3 after the big hit end setting process 2, the special figure high probability is achieved. It becomes the 2nd specific game state.
By the above processing, the specific game state which is the high probability state after the end of the first special game state can be set. In other words, the game control device 100 increases the probability that the result of the special-variation display game will be a special result as compared with the normal state (first specific game state ST2, second special game state ST3 with a special figure high probability). Is generated as a specific game state generating means.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
FIG. 48 shows the small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y149) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the small hit fanfare middle process, first, a small hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and an effect command setting process (step Y1202) is performed. Next, 8 relating to the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1203), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204).

  Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step Y1206). The large winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1207), and the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1208). The processing during the hit fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 49 shows the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing. In the special figure 2 small hit ending processing, first, 0 which is related to the special figure 2 usual processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning award opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), the number of the light off is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1335). Step Y1336). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (during normal game state) (step Y1337), and if special figure low probability & time saving is not being performed (step Y1337; N), the process proceeds to step Y1340. I do. If the special figure low probability and no time saving are being performed (step Y1337; Y), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340).

  If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1341), and an effect command setting process (step Y1342) is performed. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing ends. As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the variable display game is performed, and when the other variable display game whose execution control is performed by the other variable display game execution control unit has a special result, one variable display game is executed. The resumption control means is capable of executing resumption control for resuming the resumption of one of the fluctuating display games which has been interrupted and resumed after the special game state based on the other fluctuating display game has ended.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step X114) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure variation display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general power winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has elapsed or the time has already elapsed, the process is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table is prepared in the register (step B5), and a general-purpose game process number is loaded and prepared (step B6), and a 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (step B7). As a result, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number is obtained from the general-purpose game sequence branch table, and a subroutine call is performed based on the general-purpose game process number (step B8).

In step B8, when the general-figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the general-figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start and the effect of the general-figure fluctuation display game are set. A general-purpose routine process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
If the general-figure game process number is “1” in step B8, the general-figure change processing (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the general-figure display processing is performed.

Also, in step B8, if the general-figure game processing number is “2”, if the result of the general-figure change display game is a hit, setting of the general power release time in accordance with whether or not the time saving state is in effect In addition, a normal map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hit process is performed.
In step B8, if the general figure game processing number is "3", the general figure general processing is continued or the information necessary for performing the general electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (Step B12) is performed.

In addition, in step B8, if the general figure game processing number is "4", the general power remaining sphere processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure end processing is performed.
If the general-purpose game process number is "5" in step B8, a general-purpose hit end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the general-purpose normal process is performed.

Then, after preparing a general symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (step B15), a symbol fluctuation control process (step B15) relating to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display 53 is performed. B16) is performed, and the ordinary map game process ends.
On the other hand, in step B4, if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not “0” (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B15, Do.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display processing (step B11) in the general-figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the process of displaying a normal figure, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal process of the normal figure is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (Step B503).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to ordinary processing is set as the processing number (step B520), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B520). B521). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B522), and the process of displaying the ordinary figure is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), a hitting process setting table is prepared (step B504), and normal symbol stop symbol information is loaded and prepared (step B505). A data acquisition process is performed (step B506). As a result, a hit start pointer value and a hit end pointer value corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol information are obtained from the hitting process setting table.

  Then, the obtained value of the hit start pointer (for example, “0” or “5”) is saved in the control pointer area during normal hitting (step B507), and the obtained value of the hit end pointer (for example, “4”) is saved. Or, “7”) is saved in the end pointer area per ordinary figure (step B508). Next, a general-purpose opening time table is prepared (step B509), and the general-purpose stop symbol information is loaded and prepared (step B510), and a 2-byte data acquisition process is performed (step B511). As a result, the general power release time corresponding to the general symbol stop symbol information is obtained from the general power release time table. Then, the acquired ordinary power release time (for example, 1700 ms or 2600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area (step B512).

  Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal-per-prize processing (step B513), and the process number is saved in the general-figure game process number area (step B514). After that, a test signal (for example, an ordinary signal for turning on a normal symbol 1 ON) and a signal for starting a normal power operation (for example, turning ON a normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) for a start of a normal figure change display game are given as test signals. The output data area is saved (step B515), and ON data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B516).

  Further, the information of the general telephone count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize apparatus 37 is cleared (step B517), and the general number winning prize to the normal variable prize apparatus 37 during the general illegal fraud monitoring period is stored. The information of the illegal winning number area is cleared (step B518). Then, the flag (out-of-fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B519), and the process of displaying the normal figure is ended.

[2-byte data acquisition processing]
FIG. 52 shows two-byte data acquisition processing in the above-described special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, fanfare / interval processing, general figure game processing, and general figure display processing (steps Y107, Y140, Y944, B7). , B506, and B511). In the 2-byte data acquisition process, first, the value of the register input as a pointer is doubled (step Y971), and the calculated value is added to the register input as a reference address (step Y972). Then, two-byte data is acquired from the address after the addition (step Y973), and the two-byte data acquisition process ends.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 53 shows the symbol change control process (steps Y117, Y154, B16) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing, special figure 2 game processing, and general figure game processing. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display unit 58 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, the address of the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1, special figure 2, or ordinary figure) is acquired (step Y1401), and it is determined whether the symbol of the control object is changing. A check is made (step Y1402).

  If the variation control flag is changing (step Y1403; Y), a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is obtained (step Y1404), and a blink control timer related to the symbol to be controlled. An area is prepared (step Y1405), and a 1-byte subtraction process is performed to update the blink control timer for the symbol to be controlled by -1 (step Y1406). A determination is made (step Y1407).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step 1407; N), the flow shifts to step Y1412. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step 1407; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the control target (step Y1408), and the symbol of the control target is saved. Is prepared (step Y1409), and a variable symbol number upper limit determination value (common to special and ordinary figures) is prepared (step Y1410). Then, a 1-byte addition process is performed to update the variable symbol number of the symbol to be controlled by +1 (step Y1411), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1412). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the variation control flag is not varying (step Y1403; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1413). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is obtained (step Y1414), the obtained display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1415), and the symbol variation control processing ends. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display unit 58, the special figure or general figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display or the general figure display unit 58 to be controlled. Will be displayed.

[1 byte subtraction processing]
FIG. 54 shows a one-byte subtraction process (step Y1406) in the above-described symbol variation control process. In this one-byte subtraction processing, first, it is determined whether or not the content of the target area is 0 (step Y1421), and if it is 0 (step Y1421; Y), the one-byte subtraction processing ends. If it is not 0 (step Y1421; N), the content of the target area is updated by -1 (step Y1422), and the 1-byte subtraction process ends.

[1 byte addition processing]
FIG. 55 shows a one-byte addition process (step Y1411) in the above-described symbol variation control process. In this one-byte addition process, first, the contents of the target area are loaded (step Y1431), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step Y1432), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1432). Y1433).

  If the update value is smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1433; Y), the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and the 1-byte addition process ends. If the update value is not smaller than the upper limit determination value (step Y1433; N), 0 is set as the update value (step Y1434), the update value is saved in the target area (step Y1435), and 1 byte The addition processing ends.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, the details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X601), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X602; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X601). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X602; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X603).

  Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X604), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X605). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step X605; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step X604). If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step X605; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step X606), and the effect command setting process ends.

  In the above-described example, the start condition of the special game state is that the game ball passes through the general-purpose starting gate 34 after the special result is derived. However, as a modified example, only the derivation of the special result is performed in the special game state. It may be a start condition. In this case, the processing of FIGS. 57 to 60 is performed.

[Processing while displaying special figure 1]
The special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 57 is performed instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. 39. In the special figure 1 display processing, when the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), the processing of steps Y942 to Y946 performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed. In the process (step Y754) of saving the test signal relating to the start of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the special figure 1 big hit) in the test signal output data area, the condition device in-operation signal is turned ON and the special symbol 1 signal Is turned on, and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on.

[Special figure 2 display processing]
The special figure 2 displaying process shown in FIG. 58 is performed instead of the special figure 1 displaying process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 displaying process, when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the processing of steps Y942 to Y946 performed in the fanfare / interval processing shown in FIG. 42 is performed. In the process of saving the test signal relating to the start of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (the special figure 2 big hit) in the test signal output data area (step Y816), the condition device in-operation signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 hit signal Is turned on, and the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing]
59 shows the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764, Y826) in the special figure 1 displaying processing shown in FIG. 57 and the special figure 2 displaying processing shown in FIG. 58. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal output at a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time reduction state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time The shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is set to OFF.

  After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode is executed. The special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the flag for saving time-saving time is saved in the flag-of-flight game mode flag area (step Y876), and the command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored is saved in the transmission command field for restoration of power failure. ) Is saved (step Y877), and the time reduction fluctuation count area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game that can be executed in the time reduction state is cleared (step Y878). Thereby, the high probability state and the time saving operation state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal operation state.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y879), a signal related to the right-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the right-hand state is displayed in the gaming state display number 2 area. The number is saved (step Y881). After that, the upper winning award opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y882), the out-of-fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning award opening unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step Y883), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is performed. To end.

  Note that, also in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (steps Y764 and Y826) in the special figure 1 displaying processing shown in FIG. 39 and the special figure 2 displaying processing shown in FIG. 40, the processing of steps Y871 to Y882 is performed. I have.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
The processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. 60 is performed instead of the processing during the fanfare / interval shown in FIG. In this fanfare / interval processing, the processing of steps Y940 to Y949 is not performed. These processes are performed in the processes of FIGS.

Next, an example of the data structure of the ROM 111B is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 61A, the ROM 111B provided in the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 includes a program / data area in which programs and fixed data are stored, and arbitrary data such as a program title and version. Area, a vector table area for storing a table for setting the start address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing, and the internal functions of the game microcomputer 111 set in hardware. (HW) parameter area in which parameters for performing the operation are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the program / data area includes, in order from the beginning, a program area 111Ba in which various programs are stored, a first unused area 111Bb, and a data area 111Bc in which various fixed data are stored. And a second unused area 111Bd. When the CPU 111A accesses the second unused area 111Bd, an illegal access reset occurs.

  In the data area 111Bc, as shown in FIG. 61B, an area A1 for an upper limit judgment value table in which an upper limit judgment value table used in a big hit judgment is stored, and a performance display in which data relating to the performance display are stored. There are provided various data areas such as a data area A3. An unused area A2 for which access is prohibited is provided between the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table and the area A3 for performance display in the data area 111Bc. Then, when the CPU 111A accesses the unused area A2, an illegal access reset occurs.

The CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X585 of the prefetch big hit determination process (FIG. 18) or step Y315 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 27). At this time, the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is acquired from the ROM 111B and set using the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM as a pointer.
Further, the CPU 111A sets the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value in step X584 of the prefetching big hit determination process (FIG. 18) or step Y314 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 27). At this time, the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is obtained from the ROM 111B and set using the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM as a pointer.

  In the pre-reading jackpot determination process or the jackpot determination process, the process of determining whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (0 to 5 in the present embodiment) is not performed. Therefore, even when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range, data is obtained from the ROM 111B using the value (abnormal value) as a pointer. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 62, when the unused area A2 is not arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table, that is, the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for the performance display. Are adjacent to each other, an accurate big hit determination cannot be performed, which may cause a problem that the big hit becomes extremely easy or the big hit becomes extremely difficult.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, a case where the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table and the area A3 for the performance display are adjacent to each other and the upper limit judgment value during the low probability is obtained from the ROM 111B. When the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5" (within the normal range), the value is used as a pointer to determine the upper limit corresponding to "setting 6" in the low probability. Values, that is, accurate data can be obtained. On the other hand, when the value of the probability set value area in the RWM is “7” (out of the normal range), the value stored in the performance display area A3 is set by using the value as a pointer. That is, incorrect data is obtained. The same applies to the case where an upper limit judgment value during high probability is obtained from the ROM 111B.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61B, the unused area A2 is arranged immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table. Accordingly, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is out of the normal range, if the upper limit determination value is obtained from the ROM 111B using the value as a pointer, the unused area (access prohibited area) A2 Since access is made, an illegal access reset occurs. This makes it possible to initialize the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM and to notify an abnormality.

  Specifically, when an illegal access reset occurs, the program is restarted and the main processing (FIGS. 9 and 10) is started. At that time, since the processing at the time of the power failure occurrence (steps X55 to X61) is not executed before the restart, the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is not the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 in the main processing after the restart. Is determined (step X16; N). Further, at this time, since the setting change operation (operation of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not performed at the time of the restart, in the main processing after the restart, the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are not operated. It is determined that both are off (step X21; N). Therefore, the processing of steps X25 and X26 is executed, and a setting change operation is required, that is, an abnormality is notified. Then, by this request (notification), the power of the gaming machine is turned on again while executing the setting change operation, so that the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is initialized ( Step X28).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (c), the area A1 for the upper limit judgment value table may be arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc. In this case, even if the unused area A2 is not disposed immediately after the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table, an illegal access reset occurs when the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is outside the normal range. I do. That is, when the area A1 for the upper limit determination value table is arranged at the end of the data area 111Bc, and when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is out of the normal range, the upper limit is used as a pointer from the ROM 111B. If an attempt is made to obtain the determination value, the second unused area (access prohibited area) 111Bd will be accessed, and an illegal access reset will occur.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a control unit (game control device 100 (CPU 111A)) for controlling a game, and a storage unit (game) for storing information necessary for control of the game by the control unit. A control device 100 (ROM 111B)), and each storage area included in the area for the probability value table (area A1 for the upper limit determination value table) among the plurality of storage areas of the storage means has the storage area Is stored in the probability setting value (the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM) stored in the storage means among the plurality of storage areas. Information (data) is obtained from the corresponding storage area, and a lottery of the game (big hit determination) is performed using the information, and the storage means stores the information continuously in the area for the probability value table. There unused area (unused area A2, the second unused area 111Bd) is configured to be disposed (see FIG. 61 (b), (c)).
With this configuration, when the probability set value (value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM) stored in the storage unit is out of the normal range, the unused area (unused area A2, The second unused area 111Bd) will be accessed. That is, when an accurate lottery result is not obtained, the lottery itself is not executed, so that it is possible to avoid inconveniences that the lottery is remarkably easily won or the lottery is hardly won.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 63 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interruption is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

  After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on an operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is read in a timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect content is performed.

  Then, a hole setting mode process for accepting the setting of a changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10), and the player setting mode for accepting the operation of changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player Processing is performed (step C11). Next, a random number update process (step C12) for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

  Next, a received command check process (Step C13) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (Step C14) for editing settings for controlling progress of the effect and drawing commands. ) To set the end of the preparation of the drawing command (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and the processing is performed until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C16). In the present embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1/30 second for one frame), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is input twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image update (frame switching) may be performed in 1/60 second, or the image updating (frame switching) may be performed later than 1/60 second. Switching). If it is determined in step C16 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C16; N), the processing of step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C16 that the current time is the frame switching timing (step C16; Y), an instruction to draw a screen is issued (step C17).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C18) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C18) for controlling LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C19), a board that performs a movable body control process (step C20) for controlling the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the board effect device 44, and controls effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the accumulated value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (Step C21) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (Step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 64 shows a received command check process in the main process described above. In the received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands have been received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as a command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (Step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (the RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thus, in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, the command (data) can be moved to make a space. In addition, the analysis of the command can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (Step C210; N), the process returns to Step C207. When it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing ends. As described above, in the received command check processing, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are analyzed collectively. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 65 shows a received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In the received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Also, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C234). In C234; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for commanding an operation related to a small hit middle production (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit command (step C237; Y), the big hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot-related command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what the stop symbol of the special figure is). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol command (step C239; Y), the symbol command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of the symbol-type command (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of single-shot type commands such as the hold number command and the error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. The single command includes a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-reading symbol command (step C243). If the MODE is determined to be within the range of the pre-reading symbol-related command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol-related command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analyzing process ends.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the prefetching pattern command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching variable command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. A look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not a big hit occurs when a special-figure variation display game corresponding to a start-up memory (holding) in which the special-figure variation display game is not executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of fluctuation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability to the player, the display of the decoration special figure start display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a mode different from the normal mode. For example, an effect display is performed. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern or a stop pattern corresponding to a start memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 66 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-mentioned symbol command processing.

  If the special figure type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the special figure type is not determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether there is any mismatch (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a symbol category, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 16R big hit symbol, a 10R big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like. The case where the fluctuation command and the symbol type are inconsistent means that when a variation command (variation pattern command) is received but a design command of a 16R big hit symbol is received, an effect is performed. It means that it is a contradictory combination (combination of the fluctuation command and the symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a fluctuation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the fluctuation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure fluctuation is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, the special figure is being changed means that the special figure is being changed (during a demonstration waiting for a customer, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). Further, if the number of prefetching effects (the number of prefetching executions) is not zero, the number of prefetching effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of prefetching effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command processing ends.

[Big hit command processing]
FIG. 67 shows the big hit command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). If MODE is a fanfare (step C401; Y), a fanfare effect setting process for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big hit or small hit is performed (step C402), and the state of the P machine is changed to the fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. If the MODE is a round (step C404; Y), a round effect setting process for updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C405), and the state of the P machine is set during the round (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

  If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the state of the P machine is set during the interval (step C409), and the big hit is performed. Terminates system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the end of the final round or a small hit end screen command at the end of the small hit.

  If MODE is ending (step C410; Y), an ending effect setting process for setting an ending effect at the end of a big hit or a small hit is performed (step C411), and the P machine state is set to ending (step C411). C412), the big hit command processing ends. If MODE is not ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special winning opening count command based on winning in the special variable winning device.

  If MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit command processing ends. If the MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit command process ends.

<Setting suggestion effect>
The effect control device 300 can store the setting history of the probability set value in the FeRAM 323, and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a past or current probability set value based on the setting history.
When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a command for restoring the power failure (step X42) or a command for initializing the RAM (step X46) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. These commands include a probability setting information command (a command indicating a current probability setting value), and the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, for example, receives the probability setting information command when receiving the probability setting information command. Based on the command and the information from RTC 338 (information indicating the current date and time), the current probability setting value and the current date (current date) are stored in the setting history area of FeRAM 323 in association with each other.
Note that an upper limit (for example, 90 days) may be set for the probability set value that can be stored in the setting history area. In this case, for example, when the probability setting information command is received in a state where the upper limit has been reached, the probability setting value corresponding to the oldest date is cleared, and the probability setting value corresponding to the latest date (current day) is cleared. Is stored.

If the probability setting information command is received a plurality of times on the same day, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, for example, sets the probability setting value (current day and current day) corresponding to the current day stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323. Overwrites the associated probability setting) with the latest probability setting. Therefore, the probability setting value set at the end of the day remains as a history.
Note that the probability setting value remaining in the setting history area is not limited to the probability setting value set at the end of the day and can be changed as appropriate. For example, even if the probability setting value set for the longest day is set Alternatively, the probability set value may be a value set at a predetermined time (eg, noon) of the day. In this case, for example, the latest probability setting value is stored as the probability setting value corresponding to the current day until a predetermined timing of the day (for example, when the power is turned off). The corresponding probability set value is stored as the corresponding probability set value (that is, the probability set value set for the longest day of the day, the probability set value set at a predetermined time of the day, etc.).

In addition, the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is being changed based on the reception of the command (step X30) during the change of the probability setting, and receives the command (step X37) during the confirmation of the probability setting. The fact that the probability set value is being confirmed is notified based on the probability set value. The effect control device 300 may notify the setting history of the probability set value during the execution of the notification. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 68A, the setting history calendar created based on the information (date and probability setting value) stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 is displayed on the display device 41. May be. Thus, the clerk of the game store or the like can change or check the probability setting value while referring to the past probability setting value.
In the example shown in FIG. 68 (a), the area corresponding to the current day (20xx / year / month 31) is surrounded by a thick frame.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 (a), since the setting history calendar displayed when the power is turned on for the first time on that day is shown, the probability setting is made in the area corresponding to the current day (20xx / year / month 31). No value is displayed. In other words, if the probability setting value is changed or confirmed at the first power-on of the day, the probability setting information command at the beginning of the day is transmitted after the change or confirmation is completed, so that the change or confirmation is being performed. No probability setting value corresponding to the current day is stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323. Therefore, the probability setting value corresponding to the current day cannot be displayed on the setting history calendar displayed when the power is first turned on on that day.

FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the setting of the gaming machine by the operation of the clerk of the gaming shop. For example, when the production button 25 is pressed twice in the state of waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened, the hall setting mode is set, and a hall setting screen as shown in FIG. Is done.
In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), as items that can be set on the hall setting screen, “volume setting” for setting the upper limit of the range in which the volume can be changed in the player setting mode, and decoration in the player setting mode Set the upper limit of the range in which the brightness of the LED used can be changed. Set whether to enable or disable the upper limit set in “LED brightness setting”, “volume setting” or “LED brightness setting”. The item of “upper limit of player adjustment” is displayed. In addition, items of “liquid crystal brightness setting” for setting the brightness of the display device 41, “power saving setting” for setting the presence or absence of the power saving mode, and “logo color setting” for setting the display color of the logo are displayed. Further, items of “setting history recording” for setting whether or not the setting history of the probability setting value is stored and “setting suggesting effect” for setting whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect and the content thereof are displayed. In these items, the current settings are displayed in an identifiable manner. Further, an item for terminating the hall setting mode and an item of “factory default setting” for returning to the factory default setting are also displayed.

  Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 68 (b), an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen may be displayed on the hole setting screen. In the hall setting screen, for example, by performing an operation of touching any one of the upper and lower sides of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25, an item can be selected (cursor is moved), and an operation of touching any of the left and right sides of the touch panel 29 is performed By doing so, the current settings can be changed.

The currently selected item is indicated by a cursor highlighted so as to surround the item. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), the cursor is positioned at the item of “setting suggestion effect”. In the item of “setting suggestion effect”, “OFF” is a setting for not performing the setting suggestion effect, and “ON (day of the week)” is a setting suggestion according to the probability setting value set on the same day of the week as the current day of the week. The setting for performing an effect, and “ON (one week)” is a setting for performing a setting suggestive effect according to the probability set value set in the latest one week including the current day, and is an example illustrated in FIG. "ON (one week)" is selected. That is, on the hall setting screen, it is possible to select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and to select the content (type) of the setting suggestion effect to be executed.
In the item of “setting history record”, “OFF” is a setting that does not store the setting history of the probability setting value, and “ON” is a setting that stores the setting history of the probability setting value. In the example shown in b), "ON" is selected. That is, it is possible to select whether or not to store the setting history of the probability setting value on the hall setting screen.

  The effect control device 300 displays a hall setting screen on the display device 41 to accept setting of a gaming machine by an operation of a game store clerk, or displays a player setting screen on the display device 41 to play a game by an operation of a player. A hall / player setting mode process (step C10) is performed as a process for accepting the setting of the machine. In the hall / player setting mode processing, for example, when the current setting of “setting suggestion effect” is changed on the hall setting screen, the changed setting (execution of setting suggestion effect) in the setting suggestion effect area of the FeRAM 323 is performed. Is overwritten. Further, for example, when the current setting of “setting history recording” is changed on the hall setting screen, the changed setting (presence / absence of setting history recording) is overwritten in the setting suggestive effect area of the FeRAM 323. Also, for example, when it is selected to return to the factory default setting in the “factory default setting” on the hall setting screen, the information (date and probability set value) stored in the setting history area of the FeRAM 323 Are all cleared.

  Upon receiving the probability setting information command, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 checks the presence / absence (ON / OFF) of the setting history record stored in the setting suggestive effect area of the FeRAM 323, and sets “Yes (ON)”. If stored, the current probability is stored in the area for the setting history of the FeRAM 323 and the area for the probability setting value of the FeRAM 323 (the area corresponding to the area for the probability setting value in the RWM of the game control device 100). Store the set value. On the other hand, when “absence (OFF)” is stored, the current probability setting value is stored only in the probability setting value area of the FeRAM 323.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 sets the color of the logo displayed on the display device 41 at the end of the ending effect executed during the first special game state (the special game state based on the big hit) as the setting suggestion effect. Then, an effect is displayed in which a color for suggesting a setting (for example, silver) different from a normal color (a color that can be set on the hall setting screen) is displayed.
In addition, as a setting suggestion effect, a “day of the week setting suggestion effect” executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set for a predetermined day of the week (the same day of the week as the current day of the week), The “period setting suggestion effect” that is executed when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value among the probability setting values set in a predetermined period (the latest one week including the current day), and the current probability setting value is It is possible to execute “present day setting suggestion effect” executed when the value is equal to or more than the predetermined value.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined day is the same day as the current day. That is, the “day of the week setting suggestion effect” is an effect that is executed when the probability setting value set to the same day as the current day has a probability setting value equal to or more than a predetermined value. May be different from the day of the week. Further, the day of the week may be selected on a hall setting screen or the like.
Further, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period is the latest one week including the current day. That is, the “period setting suggestion effect” is an effect that is executed when a probability setting value equal to or more than a predetermined value is included in the probability setting values set in the latest one week including the current day. It is not limited to the last week including the current day, and may be, for example, the last week not including the current day, the last month including (or not including) the current day, The last three days including (or not including) days may be used. Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to include the length of the period and the current date on a hall setting screen or the like.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 69 shows an ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described big hit command process (FIG. 67). In the ending effect setting process, first, an ending effect is set based on the hit type information, which is the information of the big hit type and the small hit type, which triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time (step C451). It is determined whether the set ending effect is an ending effect for executing a logo display effect (step C452). Here, the logo display effect is an effect that is performed at the end of the ending effect, and is an effect in which the logo is displayed on the display device 41 in the color set in the “logo color setting” on the hall setting screen.

If the set ending effect is not the ending effect for executing the logo display effect (step C452; N), the ending effect setting process ends. On the other hand, if the set ending effect is an ending effect for executing a logo display effect (step C452; Y), a setting suggestion effect determination process is performed (step C453).
If the setting suggestion effect determination process has not determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when the setting suggestion effect determination processing determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C454; Y), the setting suggestion effect is set in place of the logo display effect (step C455), and the ending effect setting process ends.

By performing the process of step C455, a setting suggestion effect of displaying a logo in a color for setting suggestion is executed instead of a logo display effect of displaying a logo in a color set in “Logo color setting” of the hall setting screen. Will be done. In addition, the color for setting suggestion is not limited to a color that cannot be set on the hole setting screen. For example, a color that can be set on the hole setting screen and the current display color of the logo (“logo” on the hole setting screen) Other than the color set in the “color setting”).
Further, the setting suggestion effect may be any display effect different from the logo display effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect is based on the display color, size, display position, and movement of the logo, and the display color, size, display position, and movement of images other than the logo (eg, character images and character images) displayed in the logo display effect. Any one or more of the background colors in the logo display effect may be different from the logo display effect.

(Setting suggestion effect judgment processing)
FIG. 70 shows the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the above-described ending effect setting process (FIG. 69). In the setting suggestion effect determination process, first, it is determined whether the number of payouts (total number of payouts based on winning in the winning area) from when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on to the present is equal to or more than a specified number (for example, 5000). A determination is made (step C461). In the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X109), the game control device 100 sends the effect control device 300 a winning detection command corresponding to the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and a starting opening 1 switch of the starting winning opening 36. A prize detection command corresponding to 36a, a prize detection command corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37, and a prize detection command corresponding to the special prize port switches 38a, 39a of the special fluctuation prize apparatuses 38, 39 The effect control device 300 can calculate the number of acquired payouts based on these commands.

If the number of balls to be obtained since the power was turned on is not equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. Thus, if the number of balls to be obtained from the time of power-on is less than the specified number, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be suppressed.
On the other hand, if the number of balls to be obtained since the power was turned on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461; Y), it is determined whether the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462). In the performance display editing process (step X52), a command relating to the base value and the accessory ratio displayed on the performance display device 153 is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300. In 300, the current base value can be grasped based on this command. Here, the base value is a payout based on the number of game balls detected by an out switch for detecting all game balls (safe balls and out balls) fired in the game area 32 and completing the game, and a winning in the prize area. It is a value calculated from a number. In addition, the ratio of bonuses is, during the state of the big hit (that is, fanfare and ending), of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the winning opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. This is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls obtained for each role) (so-called continuous role ratio) obtained by winning the special winning opening in (excluding the middle).

  If the current base value is not equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462; N), the setting suggestion determination processing ends. As a result, if the current base value is less than the specified value, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be suppressed. Further, the setting suggestion effect of the present embodiment is that the past or current probability setting value has a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined value, that is, the past or current jackpot probability value (probability value) is relatively high. Since the effect suggests the setting, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect can be increased by executing the setting suggestion effect only when the current base value is high (when the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value). . In addition, before determining whether or not the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether or not the number of balls to be obtained since power-on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461). It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the appropriate base value.

In addition, the more the specified number of acquired payouts, the more accurate the base value can be obtained. However, if the prescribed number of acquired payouts is too large, the acquired payout number becomes equal to or more than the prescribed number (ie, It takes time until the setting suggestion effect becomes executable. Therefore, the specified number of the acquired payout balls is set in consideration of these balances.
The specified value of the base value is, for example, the lower limit of the normal range in designing the base value. Since the normal range in the design of the base value differs depending on the current probability setting value, that is, the current value of the jackpot probability (probability value), in step C462, the current base value is set to the normal value corresponding to the current probability setting value. It is determined whether it is equal to or more than the lower limit of the range. In step C462, it is determined whether or not the current base value is within the normal range corresponding to the current probability setting value. If not, the setting suggestion effect determination processing is terminated, and In the case of, it is also possible to configure to proceed to Step C463. Also, in step C462, the current accessory ratio may be determined instead of the current base value.

On the other hand, when the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462; Y), ON / OFF (presence / absence) of execution of the setting suggestion effect stored in the setting suggestion effect region of the FeRAM 323 is OFF. Is determined (step C463), and if it is OFF (step C463; Y), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. Thereby, when OFF is selected in the item of “setting suggestion effect” on the hall setting screen, the setting suggestion effect is not executed.
If the execution of the setting suggestion effect is ON (step C463; N), it is determined whether the setting history record ON / OFF (presence or absence) stored in the setting suggestion effect region of the FeRAM 323 is OFF. If it is OFF (step C464; Y), that is, if the setting history of the probability setting value is not stored, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the FeRAM 323 (that is, step C464). It is determined whether the current probability setting value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4) (step C468). If the current probability setting value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. If the current probability setting value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; Y), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and the setting suggestion effect determination process ends.

  On the other hand, when the setting history record is ON (step C464; N), it is determined whether the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the setting suggestion effect area of the FeRAM 323 is “day of the week” (step C465). . If it is not “day of the week” (step C465; N), that is, if it is “one week”, each probability setting set in the most recent week including the current day from the setting history (area for setting history of FeRAM 323) A value is extracted, and it is determined whether any of these probability setting values has a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, setting 4) (step C466). Then, when there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values for the latest one week (step C466; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. If there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values for the latest week (step C466; Y), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is “day of the week” (step C465; Y), the probability setting value (probability setting corresponding to the current day) set from the setting history (area for setting history of FeRAM 323) to the same day of the week as the current day of the week is set. (Including value), and it is determined whether or not there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, setting 4) among these probability setting values (step C467). When there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values of the same day of the week as the current day of the week (step C467; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. If the probability setting value of the same day of the week as the current day of the week includes a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (step C467; Y), execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C469), and the setting suggestion is made. The effect determination processing ends.

In the setting suggestion effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the number of balls to be obtained since the power was turned on is equal to or greater than a specified number (step C461) and whether or not the current base value is equal to or greater than a specified value (step C462). At least one may be omitted.
Further, the processing of step C462 may be performed after the processing of steps C466 to C468. That is, in the setting suggestion effect determination process, when there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values of the latest one week including the current day (step C466; N), the probability setting of the same day of the week as the current day of the week is set. If there is no probability setting value equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value (step C467; N), or if the current probability setting value is not equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; N), the current base value is defined. It is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than the value (step C462). If the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value, execution of the setting suggestion effect may be determined. In this case, the specified value of the base value is, for example, the lower limit value of the normal range in the design of the base value when the probability setting value is a predetermined threshold value (for example, setting 4), so that the actually set value is set. There is no past or present probability setting value that is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, but the setting is suggested when the actual probability setting value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (that is, when the payout situation is favorable). Since the effect is executed, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be increased without lowering the reliability of the setting suggestion effect. Also, in this case, before determining whether the current base value is equal to or greater than the specified value (step C462), it is determined whether the number of balls to be obtained since power-on is equal to or greater than the specified number (step C461). Is preferred.

The setting suggestion effect is based on the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46, the operation of the panel effect device 44, and the output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b. Any effect that suggests the set value may be used.
Further, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the one that is executed instead of the logo display effect that is executed at the end of the ending effect. That is, the setting suggestion effect may be any one that is executed instead of any of the effects executed on the gaming machine 10. For example, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed instead of any of the effects performed during the fanfare effect, the setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is executed in the fanfare effect setting process (step C402). Is If the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any effect executed as an effect (pre-reading effect) relating to an unexecuted special figure change display game, a pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect determination processing (FIG. 70) is performed in the prefetch variation command processing (step C246). If the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in place of any effect executed as an effect relating to the running special figure change display game, the change effect setting process of the change command processing (step C365). , A setting suggestion effect determination process (FIG. 70) is performed.
Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed, for example, in place of the announcement effect relating to the running special figure change display game. In that case, the effect control device 300 may be configured as shown in FIG. 71, for example. Execute the fluctuation effect setting process.

(Variable effect setting processing)
FIG. 71 shows an example of the fluctuation effect setting processing (step C365) in the above-described fluctuation command processing. In the fluctuation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the variation without reach (step C381; Y), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without a reach, the symbol type is always a lost symbol, and it is not necessary to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally depends on the model. Here, there are a normal mode, a chance mode, a small hit RUSH, and the like. Further, in each mode, there are provided a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, an address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (step C383). Thereby, in the case of the fluctuation without reach, it becomes possible to change the lottery content (specifically, the appearance rate of each preview production mode) of the preview production that appears during each fluctuation in accordance with the number of reservations. Thereafter, a lottery of a notice appearing during the first half change is performed using the first-half notice distribution group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is not the fluctuation without reach (step C381; N), the first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the first-half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is obtained (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice distribution group table. Is performed (step C386).

  Next, a preliminary announcement effect of the second half change is drawn by lottery. Note that the latter half of the special figure change display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a change display in a special result mode (a special symbol combination) in which a display area other than a specific area in a plurality of rows of the special figure has a big hit). Is stopped and the variable display is performed only in the specific area). On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second-half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second-half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the second-half advance distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired with reference to the second-half advance distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half advance distribution group table is being used (during reach) using the second-half advance distribution group table. The lottery of the appearing notice is performed (step C389).

Thereafter, the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, an effect and a notice such as a fluctuating time and main reach content of the decorative special figure fluctuating display game are determined. Further, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special figure change display game, the content of the notice, and the game state is performed (step C392).
Next, the display setting of the variable effect is performed (step C393), and the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C394). Through these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect among the notice effects that have been set for display in step C394 (step C399a). C399a; N) proceeds to Step C395. If there is a changeable announcement effect in the setting suggestion effect (step C399a; Y), a setting suggestion effect determination process is performed (step C399b). Thus, for example, a setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70 is performed.
If the setting suggestion effect determination processing has not determined the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C399c; N), the process proceeds to step C395. If the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C399c; Y), the setting suggestion effect is displayed and set in place of the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect (step C399d). Move to C395.

  For example, if the notice effect that can be changed to the setting suggestion effect is an effect that displays the main character during the reach, and the setting suggestion effect is an effect that displays the character for setting suggestion during the reach, the advance effect When the setting suggestion effect is displayed and set instead of, a character for setting suggestion appears in the reach in place of the main character. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the value of the past or present big hit probability (probability value) is relatively high.

Next, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C395). In this process, a setting is made to decrease the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the decrease in the start memory corresponding to the start of the special figure change display game.
Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C396). Display setting is performed (step C397). Further, in order to set a variation display of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C398). Then, the variable effect setting process ends.

  The setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29). Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during the logo display effect executed at the end of the ending effect. In that case, the effect control device 300 In place of the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, for example, an ending effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72 (a) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 72 (a) shows a modified example of the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described big hit command process. In this ending effect setting process, when the setting suggestion effect execution is determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C454; Y), a change reservation from the logo display effect to the setting suggestion effect, that is, the operation means during the logo display effect When a predetermined operation has been performed, a reservation is set to end the running logo display effect and start a setting suggestion effect (step C456).
By setting the change reservation in this manner, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means during execution of the logo display effect, a setting suggestion effect is executed instead of the logo display effect, and, for example, the display color of the logo is displayed. Changes from the color set in the “logo color setting” on the hall setting screen to a color for setting suggestion. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the value of the past or present big hit probability (probability value) is relatively high.

  Further, the setting suggestion effect is not limited to the effect executed in place of the effect to be executed, but may be, for example, an effect executed in addition to the effect to be executed. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be an effect additionally executed during the ending effect, in which case the effect control device 300 replaces the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69 with, for example, An ending effect setting process as shown in FIG. 72 (b) is executed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 72 (b) shows a modification of the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-described big hit command processing. In the ending effect setting process, first, an ending effect is set based on the hit type information or the like (step C451), and a setting suggestion effect lottery for determining whether to execute the setting suggestion effect is performed (step C457a). If the setting suggestion effect lottery has not been won (step C457b; N), the ending effect setting process is terminated. If the setting suggestion effect lottery has been won (step C457b; Y), the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed. Perform (Step C453).

If the setting suggestion effect determination process has not determined the execution of the setting suggestion effect (step C454; N), the ending effect setting process ends, and the setting suggestion effect determination process has been determined in the setting suggestion effect determination process. In (Step C454; Y), a setting suggestion effect is set (Step C457c), and the ending effect setting process ends. For example, when the setting suggestion effect is an effect of blinking the LED for decorating the starting winning opening 36 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 among the LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the setting suggestion effect is set (step C457c). At a predetermined timing during the ending effect, the LED for decorating the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 blinks. This makes it possible to indicate to the player that the setting suggestion effect has been executed, that is, that the value of the past or present big hit probability (probability value) is relatively high.
Here, in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72 (b), the processes of steps C457a to C457b may be omitted.
Further, in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 72 (b), a process of setting a setting suggestion effect execution reservation, that is, a process for setting a setting suggestion effect execution reservation, that is, a predetermined process for the operation means during the ending effect When an operation is performed, a process of setting a reservation for starting a setting suggestion effect may be performed.

The type (contents) of the setting suggestion effect executable in the gaming machine 10 may be one type or a plurality of types.
When there are a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects, the configuration is changed from a hall setting screen (a screen displayed on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode) to a designation screen for specifying the type of setting suggestion effect. It is also possible. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 73A, in a state where the cursor is positioned on the item of “setting suggestion effect” and “ON” is selected in the item, for example, When an operation of touching the center of the touch panel 29 on the upper surface of the effect button 25 is performed, a designation screen for designating the type of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which a transition is made from the player setting screen (the screen displayed on the display device 41 in the player setting mode) to the designation screen for designating the type of the setting suggestion effect.

In this designation screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the currently selected type is indicated by a cursor highlighted so as to surround the type of the setting suggestion effect. In the example shown in (1), the cursor is positioned at "day of week setting suggestion".
Here, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “one month average suggestion” indicates, for example, the most recent month (including the current date) from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). Alternatively, each probability set value set in the last month that does not include the current date may be extracted, an average value of these probability set values is calculated, and the process is executed in a mode corresponding to the average value. It is a directing. Thereby, the tendency of the usual probability set value in the gaming machine 10 can be suggested.
Alternatively, the “one-month average suggestion” indicates that the average value of the probability setting values of the latest month including the current day (or the last month that does not include the current day) is equal to or more than a predetermined value. The effect may be performed in the case. Thereby, it can be suggested that the probability setting value is relatively high in the gaming machine 10 from usual.

In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “one week average suggestion” indicates, for example, the latest one week (or the current day) including the current day from the setting history (area for setting history in FeRAM 323). This may be the latest one week that does not include the above), the probability setting values set in the last one week are extracted, the average value of these probability setting values is calculated, and the execution is performed in a mode according to the average value. . Thereby, it is possible to suggest a tendency of the probability set value of the gaming machine 10 for this week.
Alternatively, the “one week average suggestion” is the average of the probability settings for the last week including the current day (or the last week that does not include the current day), that is, the average of the probability settings for the current week. Is higher than the average value of the probability setting values of the last week. Thereby, it can be suggested that the probability setting value of this gaming machine 10 is higher this week than last week.

  Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “one week high setting suggestion” indicates, for example, the most recent week (or the current week) including the current date from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). (It may be the last week that does not include the day) The probability set values set in the last week are extracted, and the effect is executed when there is a probability set value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value among these probability set values. is there. That is, it is the same as the “period setting suggestion effect” described above. Thereby, it is possible to indicate that a relatively high probability set value has been set in any of the gaming machines 10 this week.

Further, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “average day suggestion” indicates, for example, a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day of the week) from the setting history (the area for setting history in the FeRAM 323). Is an effect performed by extracting each probability set value set in the above, calculating an average value of these probability set values, and executing in a manner according to the average value. Thereby, the tendency of the probability set value for the predetermined day of the week in the gaming machine 10 can be suggested.
Alternatively, the “day-of-week average suggestion” may be an effect that is executed when the average value of the probability setting values on a predetermined day is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. Thereby, it can be suggested that the probability setting value of the predetermined day of the week is relatively high in the gaming machine 10.

  In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73B, “day of week setting suggestion” indicates, for example, each probability setting value set on a predetermined day of the week from a setting history (a setting history area of the FeRAM 323). Is an effect that is executed when a probability set value equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value is included in these probability set values. That is, it is the same as the aforementioned “day of the week setting suggestion effect”. Thereby, it can be suggested that a relatively high probability set value is likely to be set on a predetermined day of the week in the gaming machine 10.

In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “daily average suggestion with 3” indicates, for example, the date on which 3 is added (3rd, 13th) from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). Day, 23rd), an effect is executed in which the respective probability set values set on the day are extracted, the average value of these probability set values is calculated, and the average value is executed in a manner corresponding to the average value. Thereby, it is possible to suggest a tendency of the probability set value of the game machine 10 on the third day.
In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “Hidden setting suggestion with 3” is, for example, a date on which 3 is added from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). This is an effect that is executed when the probability set values set on the 13th and 23rd) are extracted, and among these probability set values, the probability set values equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value are included. Thereby, it can be suggested that a relatively high probability set value is likely to be set in the gaming machine 10 on the third day.
Note that it is also possible to suggest an average or a high setting for a day with a number other than 3, for example, an average or a high setting for a day with the same number as the number on the current day. In addition, it is also possible to select which date is to be assigned on a hall setting screen or the like.

In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “deferred suggestion” means, for example, extracting the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value from the setting history (area for setting history in the FeRAM 323). However, this is an effect performed when these are the same. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, it can be suggested that the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are the same.
In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73 (b), “change suggestion” means, for example, extracting the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). However, these are effects that are executed when they are different. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, it can be suggested that the current probability set value is different from the previous day's probability set value.

  In addition, among the types of setting suggestion effects illustrated in FIG. 73B, “significant change suggestion” indicates, for example, the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). This is an effect that is extracted and executed when these differences are two or more stages. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, it can be suggested that the current probability setting value is significantly different from the previous day's probability setting value. Further, by selecting “significant change suggestion” as the type of the setting suggestion effect, for example, when the probability setting value of the previous day in the gaming machine 10 is set to 2, it is determined that the player: With the appearance of the setting suggestion effect, it can be determined that the current probability setting value is equal to or more than the setting 4 which is rich.

When the designation screen shown in FIG. 73B can be displayed, for example, a setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 74 is executed instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. In the setting suggestion effect determination process, first, a random number lottery for determining whether to execute the setting suggestion effect is performed (step C470). When the random number lottery has not been won (step C471; N), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends, and when the random number lottery has been won (step C471; Y), the process proceeds to step C463.
When ON / OFF (presence / absence) of the setting history record stored in the setting suggestive effect area of the FeRAM 323 is OFF (step C464; Y), that is, when the setting history of the probability set value is not stored Determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed if the probability setting value (that is, the current probability setting value) stored in the probability setting value area of the FeRAM 323 is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, setting 4) (step C474), the setting suggestion effect determination processing ends. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

  On the other hand, when the setting history record is ON (step C464; N), the contents of the setting suggestion effect stored in the setting suggestion effect region of the FeRAM 323 are “one month average suggestion” and “one week average”. , “Day of week average suggestion” or “daily average suggestion with 3” is determined (step C472). If it is one of “one month average suggestion”, “one week average”, “day of week average suggestion”, and “daily average suggestion with 3” (step C472; Y), the setting history (setting of FeRAM 323) The target probability set values are extracted from the history area), and if the average value is equal to or larger than a predetermined threshold (for example, setting 4), the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed (step C473), and the setting suggestion effect determination is performed. The process ends. That is, in this case, if the average value of the target probability setting values is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, in the case of “one-month average suggestion”, the target probability setting value is set in the most recent month including the current day (or may be the most recent month not including the current day). It is each probability setting value, and in the case of "one week average suggestion", it is each probability setting value set in the latest week including the current day (or may be the latest week not including the current day) In the case of “day of week suggestion”, it is the probability setting value set for a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day of the week as the current day of the week). (3 days, 13 days, and 23 days).

  If it is not one of “one month average suggestion”, “one week average suggestion”, “day of week average suggestion” and “daily average suggestion with 3” (step C472; N), the setting suggestion effect of FeRAM 323 is performed. It is determined whether the content of the setting suggestion effect stored in the area is any of “one week high setting suggestion”, “day of the week high setting suggestion”, and “three-day high setting suggestion” (step C475). . If it is any of “one week high setting suggestion”, “day high setting suggestion”, and “three day high setting suggestion” (step C475; Y), the setting history (setting history area of FeRAM 323) ), The target probability set values are extracted, and if there is a probability set value equal to or more than a predetermined threshold (for example, setting 4), the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C476), and the setting suggestion effect determination process is performed. To end. That is, in this case, if there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the target probability setting values, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, in the case of “one week high setting suggestion”, the probability setting value of the object is each probability set in the most recent week including the current day (or may be the most recent week not including the current day). In the case of "suggest day setting", it is a probability setting value set on a predetermined day of the week (for example, the same day as the current day). , Are the probability setting values set on the day with 3 (3rd, 13th, and 23rd).

  In addition, when none of “one week high setting suggestion”, “day high setting suggestion”, and “three day high setting suggestion” is present (step C475; N), it is stored in the setting suggestion effect area of the FeRAM 323. It is determined whether or not the content of the setting suggestion effect is “deferred suggestion” (step C477). If it is “deferred suggestion” (step C477; Y), the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). The execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C478), and the setting suggestion effect determination process ends. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are not the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

  If it is not “deferred suggestion” (step C477; N), it is determined whether the content of the setting suggestive effect stored in the setting suggestive effect area of the FeRAM 323 is “change suggestion” (step C479). If it is "change suggestion" (step C479; Y), the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are extracted from the setting history (the setting history area of the FeRAM 323). The execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C480), and the setting suggestion effect determination process ends. That is, in this case, if the current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are the same, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

If the setting suggestion effect is not “change suggestion” (step C479; N), that is, if the setting suggestion effect content stored in the setting suggestion effect region of the FeRAM 323 is “significant change suggestion”, the setting history (FeRAM 323 The current probability setting value and the probability setting value of the previous day are extracted from the setting history area), and if the difference between the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value is two or more, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined (step C481), and the setting suggestion effect determination is performed. The process ends. That is, in this case, if the difference between the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value is not two or more steps, the setting suggestion effect determination process ends without determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.
When the setting suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 74 is performed as the setting suggestion effect determination processing (step C453) in the ending effect setting processing shown in FIG. 72 (b), the processing of steps C457a to C457b is omitted. .

The setting suggestion effect may be an effect of displaying a setting history calendar at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform the "Day of the week high setting suggestion", "Weekly high setting suggestion", "3 day high setting suggestion", "Deferral suggestion", "Change suggestion", "Large change suggestion" at a time Becomes
When the setting suggestion effect is an effect for displaying a setting history calendar, it is preferable that the setting history calendar to be displayed vaguely suggests a probability setting value, for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 75 (a), for example, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the day on which any of the settings 1 to 3 is set is painted in blue, and any of the settings 4 to 6 is set. The days are painted red and one of them has been changed to purple.
Further, instead of (or in addition to) displaying the setting history calendar as shown in FIG. 75A as a setting suggestive effect, a setting history calendar as shown in FIG. It may be displayed when a player performs a predetermined operation during a predetermined period such as a middle period.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result. Setting means (game control device 100) for setting one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for the lottery are assigned, and storage for storing the probability setting value set by the setting means as a setting history. Means (effect control device 300 (FeRAM 323)) and predetermined parameters (for example, day of the week, one week, only the day, one month, three days, three days, and the previous day) among the probability setting values stored as the setting history ) On the basis of the probability set value corresponding to the probability set value (execution control device 300).
With this configuration, not only the suggestion effect based on the current probability setting value but also the suggestion effect based on the past probability setting value can be executed, and the probability setting value can be changed by executing the suggestion effect. It is possible to effectively appeal to the player regarding the probability setting value, such as the fact that the device is a model or that the probability setting value has been changed from usual.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not to store the setting history by a hall staff (for example, a clerk class of a clerk of a game store that can hold a setting key and perform a setting change operation. First selection means (touch panel 29) for the store clerk) to select, and second selection means (touch panel 29) for the hall staff to select whether or not the suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) can be executed. (See FIG. 68 (b)).
With such a configuration, it is optional whether to perform the suggested effect, whether the suggested effect to be performed is an effect that suggests only the current probability setting value or an effect that also suggests the past probability setting value. , The degree of freedom in the operation of the hall can be increased.
The first selecting means and the second selecting means may be different operating means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (production control device 300) includes a predetermined threshold (for example, one week, a day of the week, and a day with a 3) corresponding to predetermined parameters (probability setting values) corresponding to predetermined parameters. For example, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) according to whether or not there is a probability setting value of setting 4) or above (see FIGS. 70 and 73 (b)).
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value in the past or current probability setting values by executing the suggestion effect.

In the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed only when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value in the past or current probability setting values, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a probability setting value equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value in the past or current probability setting values, the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, and the predetermined value is set in the past or current probability setting values. If there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the threshold value, a setting suggestion effect of a second effect mode different from the first effect mode may be executed.
That is, instead of the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 70, a setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 may be executed.

In the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76, when there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values for the latest week including the current day (step C466; Y), the same day of the week as the current day of the week is used. If there is a probability setting value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values (step C467; Y), or if the current probability setting value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value (step C468; Y), the first The execution of the setting suggestion effect of the effect mode is determined (step C469a).
On the other hand, when there is no probability setting value equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value among the probability setting values of the latest week including the current day (step C466; N), the predetermined threshold value is set in the probability setting value of the same day of the week as the current day of the week. If there is no such probability setting value (step C467; N), or if the current probability setting value is not equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (step C468; N), execution of the setting suggestion effect in the second effect mode is determined. (Step C469b).

Then, for example, the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the first effect mode is performed. When the process of deciding (Step C469a) is performed, in Step C455, a setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is set in place of the logo display effect.
Also, for example, when the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 76 is performed as the setting suggestion effect determination process (step C453) in the ending effect setting process shown in FIG. 69, the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the second effect mode is performed. When the process of deciding (Step C469b) has been performed, in Step C455, a setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode is set in place of the logo display effect.

The same applies to the setting suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG.
That is, in step C473, when the average value of the target probability set values is equal to or larger than the predetermined threshold value, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the average value of the target probability set values is set to the predetermined threshold value. If not, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be determined.
In step C474, when the current probability setting value is equal to or more than the predetermined threshold value, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined. When the current probability setting value is not equal to or more than the predetermined threshold value, the process proceeds to step C474. Execution of the setting suggestion effect of the two effect modes may be determined.
Further, in Step C476, when there is a probability setting value equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value among the target probability setting values, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the predetermined probability setting value is included in the target probability setting value. If there is no probability setting value equal to or larger than the threshold value, the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the second effect mode may be determined.
If the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are the same in step C478, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are determined. If they are not the same, the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the second effect mode may be determined.
If the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are not the same in step C480, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are the same. In the case of, execution of the setting suggestion effect of the second effect mode may be determined.
In step C481, when the difference between the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value is two or more stages, the execution of the setting suggestion effect of the first effect mode is determined, and the current probability setting value and the previous day's probability setting value are determined. When the difference between the probability setting values is not two or more, execution of the setting suggestion effect in the second effect mode may be determined.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution means (production effect control device) provides a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) corresponding to any one of the average value, the change frequency, and the change amount of the probability set value corresponding to the predetermined parameter. ) Can be executed (see FIG. 73 (b)). In the example shown in FIG. 73 (b), the suggestion effects according to the average value of the probability setting values are “one month average suggestion”, “one week average suggestion”, “day of the week average suggestion”, and “daily average suggestion with 3”. , And the suggestion effect according to the change frequency of the probability set value is “deferred suggestion” and “change suggestion”, and the suggestive effect according to the change amount of the probability set value is “significant change suggestion”.
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the tendency of the probability set value in the gaming machine 10 by executing the suggestion effect.

<Hall setting, player setting>
The effect control device 300 can set a changeable range determined by the game store (hall) for the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal that can be changed by the player by the hall setting mode process (step C10). The effect control device 300 can change the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 by the player by the player setting mode process (step C11).

  FIG. 77 (a) shows an example of setting of a gaming machine by an operation of a game store clerk. For example, when the production button 25 is pressed twice in a state of waiting for a customer and the front frame 12 is opened, the hall setting mode is set, and a hall setting screen as shown in FIG. Is done. Although the display contents of the screen are substantially the same as those in FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 77 (a) shows an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen. On the hall setting screen, an item can be selected (move the cursor) by touching either up or down on the touch panel 29 on the effect button 25, and by touching either left or right on the touch panel 29. , You can change the current settings.

  The currently selected item is indicated by a cursor highlighted so as to surround the item, and in the example shown in FIG. 77 (a), the cursor is located at the item of "volume setting". Touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way decreases the value of the volume setting, and touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the value of the volume setting. In addition, by touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the cursor moves downward, and the item of the LED brightness setting is selected. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the LED brightness setting item selected, the value of the LED brightness setting decreases, and by touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the LED brightness setting increases. For other items, the values and settings are changed by touching the left and right regions of the touch panel 29 with the cursor positioned. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of the FeRAM 323.

  FIG. 77 (b) shows an example of setting of a gaming machine by a player's operation. For example, when the production button 25 is pressed during the customer waiting demonstration, the player setting mode is set, and a player setting screen as shown in FIG. 77 (b) is displayed on the display device 41.

  In the example shown in FIG. 77 (b), as the items that can be set on the player setting screen, “volume setting” that enables the volume to be changed, and “LED brightness that allows the brightness of the LED used for decoration to be changed” "Settings" item is displayed. The values of “volume setting” and “LED brightness setting” can be changed within the range of the upper limit set in the hall setting mode. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 77 (b), an explanation of the operation on the hole setting screen may be displayed on the hole setting screen. On the hall setting screen, an item can be selected (move the cursor) by touching either up or down on the touch panel 29 on the effect button 25, and by touching either left or right on the touch panel 29. , You can change the current settings.

  The currently selected item is indicated by the cursor highlighted so as to surround the item. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (b), the cursor is positioned at the item of "volume setting". Touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way decreases the value of the volume setting, and touching the right area of the touch panel 29 increases the value of the volume setting. In addition, by touching the lower area of the touch panel 29 with the volume setting selected in this way, the cursor moves downward, and the item of the LED brightness setting is selected. By touching the left area of the touch panel 29 with the LED brightness setting item selected, the value of the LED brightness setting decreases, and by touching the right area of the touch panel 29, the value of the LED brightness setting increases. The contents set in this way are stored in the area of each item of the FeRAM 323.

[Hall setting mode processing]
FIG. 78 shows the hole setting mode process (step C10) in the main process described above. In this hall setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the game shop is in the hall setting mode in which information is set (step C501). In the case of the hall setting mode, the hall setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether the vehicle is in the hole setting mode based on the presence or absence of this flag. If it is in the hole setting mode (step C501; Y), the process proceeds to step C505.

  If it is not in the hall setting mode (step C501; N), it is determined whether a start condition of the hall setting mode is satisfied (step C502). Here, the start condition of the hall setting mode is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed twice in a state of waiting for a customer and with the front frame 12 opened. If the start condition of the hole setting mode is not satisfied (step C502; N), the hole setting mode process ends. If the start condition of the hole setting mode is satisfied (step C502; Y), the start of screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C503), and the flag in the hall setting mode is set (step C504).

  Next, it is determined whether an upward cursor operation is performed as a process for selecting an item (step C505). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C505; N), the process moves to step C510. If the upward cursor operation has been performed (step C505; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C506), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C507). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C508), and the hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C509).

  Each item is associated with a value. On the hole setting screen shown in FIG. 77A, items are arranged in ascending order of value from the top. Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, an item with a smaller corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward in the hole setting screen. If the cursor operation is performed in the state where the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is located at the item displayed at the top on the hole setting screen), the item with the largest value is selected and the hole is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

  Next, it is determined whether there is a downward cursor operation (step C510). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. When there is no downward cursor operation (step C510; N), the process proceeds to step C516.

  When the downward cursor operation is performed (step C510; Y), the address of the hole setting item area is prepared (step C511), and the upper limit value of the hole setting item is prepared (step C512). Are prepared (step C513). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C514), and the hole setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C515).

  Each time a downward cursor operation is performed, an item with a larger corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward in the hole setting screen. If the cursor operation is performed in a state where the item with the largest value is selected (the cursor is located at the item displayed at the bottom of the hole setting screen), the item with the smallest value is selected and the hole is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

  Thereafter, a hall volume adjustment process (step C516) for setting a volume changeable range based on an operation input and a hall LED brightness adjustment process (step C517) for setting an LED brightness changeable range based on an operation input are performed. In these processes, both the upper limit and the lower limit may be set, or only one of them may be set. Within the range set here, the player can adjust the volume and the brightness of the LED. Further, a liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C518) for setting the liquid crystal brightness based on the operation input, and a power saving setting process (step C518) for setting the power saving state to be shifted to when the game has not been performed for a predetermined period of time. C519). In the power saving setting process (step C519), the setting as to whether to enable the power saving setting when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, and the volume, LED brightness, and liquid crystal brightness at the time of the power saving setting are set for each hole. It can be set to. In addition to the above setting, it may be possible to set whether or not to operate the movable accessory during power saving. Then, it is determined whether there is a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C520).

  If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C520; N), the hall setting mode processing ends. If there is a setting confirmation operation input (step C520; Y), it is determined whether the confirmation operation input was a factory setting (step C522). The determination operation input includes a determination operation input for determining the information set in the processing in steps C516 to C519 and a determination operation input for returning to the factory default setting, and it is determined which has been performed.

  If it is not a confirmation operation input at the factory setting (step C521; N), that is, if it is a confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in the processing of steps C516 to C519, the processing of steps C516 to C519 is performed. The determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM using the information set in the step (c) as the determined information (step C523). If the input is a confirmation operation input in the factory default setting (step C521; Y), factory default setting processing (step C522) is performed, and the information set in the processing in steps C516 to C519 is discarded. The initial value at the time of shipment is used as the determined information, and the determined hole setting data is written to the backup RAM (step C523). As a result, the initial setting values (set values of the volume, the LED brightness, and the liquid crystal brightness) stored in the PROM 321 are stored in the FeRAM 323. Thereafter, the end of the screen drawing in the hole setting mode is set (step C524), the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (step C525), and the hole setting mode process ends.

[Hall volume adjustment processing]
FIG. 79 shows the hall sound volume adjustment processing (step C516) in the above-described hall setting mode processing. In this hall sound volume adjustment processing, first, it is determined whether or not the hall sound volume can be adjusted (step C531). The state in which the hall volume can be adjusted means that the volume adjustment item is selected in the hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the hall volume adjustment is not possible (step C531; N), the hall volume adjustment processing ends. If the hall volume is adjustable (step C531; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an operation to lower the volume (step C532). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

  When there is no operation of lowering the volume (step C532; N), the process proceeds to step C537. If there is an operation of lowering the volume (step C532; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C533), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C534). . Then, a minus update process is performed (step C535), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C536). Thereby, the volume is lowered every time there is an operation of lowering the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume when the volume is at the minimum, the volume remains at the minimum value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an operation to increase the volume (step C537). The operation of increasing the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation for increasing the volume (step C537; N), the hall volume adjustment processing ends. If there is an operation to increase the volume (step C537; Y), the address of the hall volume area is prepared (step C538), the upper limit of the hall volume is prepared (step C539), and the setting after reaching the upper limit is set. A value (here, the upper limit) is prepared (step C540). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C541), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C542). Thereby, the volume is increased every time there is an operation to increase the volume. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the volume when the volume is at the maximum, the maximum value is maintained.

  If there is an operation of lowering or increasing the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. The volume of each sound to be actually output is set in the sound control processing (step C18). There is a sound such as an error sound which does not follow the hall setting value, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Hole LED brightness adjustment processing]
FIG. 80 shows the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (step C517) in the hall setting mode processing described above. In this hall LED brightness adjustment processing, first, it is determined whether or not the hall LED brightness adjustment is possible (step C551). The state in which the hall LED brightness can be adjusted is a state in which the LED brightness adjustment item is selected in the hall setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the hall LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C551; N), the hall LED brightness adjustment processing ends. If the hall LED brightness adjustment is possible (step C551; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an operation to lower the brightness (step C552). The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

  When there is no operation of lowering the luminance (Step C552; N), the process proceeds to Step C557. If there is an operation of lowering the luminance (step C552; Y), the address of the hall LED luminance area is prepared (step C553), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C554). ). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C555), and LED brightness meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C556). As a result, the luminance decreases each time there is an operation of lowering the luminance. In addition, even if there is an operation of lowering the luminance while the luminance is at the minimum, the luminance remains at the minimum value.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an operation for increasing the luminance (step C557). The operation of increasing the brightness is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation for increasing the luminance (step C557; N), the hall LED luminance adjustment processing ends. If there is an operation to increase the brightness (step C557; Y), an address of the hall LED brightness area is prepared (step C558), and an upper limit value of the hall LED brightness is prepared (step C559). (Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C560). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C561), and LED brightness meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C562). Thereby, the brightness increases each time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the luminance in a state where the luminance is maximum, the luminance remains at the maximum value.

  Note that when an operation of decreasing or increasing the luminance is performed, the LED may be caused to emit light at the changed luminance. The luminance to be actually output is set in the decoration control processing (step C19). There is a device such as light emission at the time of an error that does not follow the hall setting value, and the output is set according to the situation.

[Player setting mode processing]
FIG. 81 shows the player setting mode process (step C11) in the main process described above. In the player setting mode process, first, it is determined whether or not the player is in the player setting mode in which the player sets information (step C571). Note that when in the player setting mode, the player setting mode flag is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not the player is in the player setting mode based on the presence / absence of this flag. If it is in the player setting mode (step C571; Y), the process moves to step C575.

  In addition, when not in the player setting mode (step C571; N), it is determined whether or not the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C572). Here, the start condition of the player setting mode is, for example, that the effect button 25 is pressed once in the customer waiting state. When the start condition of the player setting mode is not satisfied (step C572; N), the player setting mode process ends. Further, when the start condition of the player setting mode is satisfied (step C572; Y), the start of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set (step C573), and the flag in the player setting mode is set (step C574). .

  Next, it is determined whether an upward cursor operation is performed as a process for selecting an item (step C575). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C575; N), the process moves to step C580. If the upward cursor operation has been performed (step C575; Y), the address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C576), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C577). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C578), and player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C579).

  Each item is associated with a value, and in the player setting screen shown in FIG. 77B, items are arranged in ascending order of value from the top. Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, an item having a smaller corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward in the player setting screen. If the cursor operation is performed in the state where the item with the smallest value is selected (the cursor is located at the item displayed at the top on the player setting screen), the item with the largest value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom on the player setting screen.

  Next, it is determined whether there is a downward cursor operation (step C580). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. When there is no downward cursor operation (Step C580; N), the process proceeds to Step C586.

  If a downward cursor operation has been performed (step C580; Y), an address of the player setting item area is prepared (step C581), and an upper limit value of the player setting item is prepared (step C582). A set value after the arrival is prepared (step C583). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C584), and player setting display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C585).

  Each time the downward cursor operation is performed, the item with the larger corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player setting screen. Also, if the downward cursor operation is performed in a state where the item with the largest value is selected (the state where the cursor is located at the item displayed at the bottom on the player setting screen), the item with the smallest value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top on the player setting screen.

  Thereafter, the player volume adjustment process (step C586) for changing the volume based on the operation input within the changeable range set in the hall volume adjustment process (step C516) described above, and the hall LED adjustment process (step C517) described above. A player LED brightness adjustment process (step C581) for changing the brightness of the LED based on the operation input within the set changeable range is performed. Then, it is determined whether there has been a setting confirmation operation input for confirming the information set in these processes (step C388).

  If there is no setting confirmation operation input (step C388; N), the player setting mode process ends. If a setting confirmation operation input has been made (step C388; Y), the information set in steps C586 and C587 is stored in the RAM 322 as player setting data, and then the end of screen drawing in the player setting mode is set. Then (step C589), the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (step C590), and the player setting mode process ends. As a result, the brightness and volume of the LED set by the player are changed.

  Note that the drawing update setting accompanying the operation input after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed in the effect button input process (step C9). Although the player setting data is stored in the RAM 322, it may be stored in the FeRAM 323. Further, the time is obtained from the RTC 338 when the power is turned off and stored in the FeRAM 322, the power-off time is calculated from the time obtained from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on, and the player setting data stored in the FeRAM 323 is calculated according to the power-off time. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to store the hole set value data. For example, if the power cutoff time is within a predetermined time, the hole setting value data is not stored in the player setting data and is kept as it is, and the power is cut off to recover from a short-time power failure or error, etc. Then, it is possible to prevent the player setting data from being reset.

[Player volume adjustment processing]
FIG. 82 shows the player volume adjustment process (step C586) in the above-mentioned player setting mode process. In this player volume adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player volume is adjustable (step C601). The state in which the player volume can be adjusted means that the volume adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. If it is not in the player volume adjustable state (Step C601; N), the player volume adjustment process ends. If the player volume is in a state where the volume can be adjusted (step C601; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an operation of lowering the volume (step C602). The operation of lowering the volume is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

  When there is no operation of lowering the volume (step C602; N), the process proceeds to step C607. If there is an operation of lowering the volume (step C602; Y), an address of the player volume area is prepared (step C603), and a set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C604). ). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C605), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C606). Thereby, the volume is lowered every time there is an operation of lowering the volume. In addition, even if there is an operation to lower the volume when the volume is at the minimum, the volume remains at the minimum value.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is an operation to increase the volume (step C607). The operation of increasing the volume is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation for increasing the volume (step C607; N), the player volume adjustment process ends. If there is an operation to increase the volume (step C607; Y), an address of the player volume area is prepared (step C608), and an upper limit value of the player volume is prepared (step C609). (Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C610). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C611), and volume meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C612). Thereby, the volume is increased every time there is an operation to increase the volume. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the volume when the volume is at the maximum, the maximum value is maintained.

  If there is an operation of lowering or increasing the volume, the operation sound may be output at the changed volume. The volume of each sound to be actually output is set in the sound control processing (step C18). There are also sounds such as error sounds that do not follow the player set value, and output settings are made according to the situation.

[Player LED brightness adjustment processing]
FIG. 83 shows the player LED brightness adjustment processing (step C587) in the above-mentioned player setting mode processing. In this player LED brightness adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the player LED brightness adjustment is possible (step C621). The state in which the player LED brightness can be adjusted means that the LED brightness adjustment item is selected in the player setting mode and the setting can be changed. If the player LED brightness adjustment is not possible (step C621; N), the player LED brightness adjustment process ends. If the player LED is in a state where the LED brightness can be adjusted (step C621; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an operation for lowering the brightness (step C622). The operation of lowering the brightness is an operation of touching the left area of the touch panel 29.

  When there is no operation of lowering the luminance (Step C622; N), the process proceeds to Step C627. If there is an operation of lowering the luminance (step C622; Y), the address of the player LED luminance area is prepared (step C623), and the set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit value) is prepared (step C623). C624). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C625), and the LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C626). As a result, the luminance decreases each time there is an operation of lowering the luminance. In addition, even if there is an operation of lowering the luminance while the luminance is at the minimum, the luminance remains at the minimum value.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an operation for increasing the luminance (step C627). The operation of increasing the brightness is an operation of touching the right area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation for increasing the luminance (step C627; N), the player LED luminance adjustment processing ends. If an operation to increase the luminance has been performed (step C627; Y), an address of the player LED luminance area is prepared (step C628), and an upper limit value of the player LED luminance is prepared (step C629). A set value after the arrival (here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C630). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C631), and LED luminance meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C632). Thereby, the brightness increases each time there is an operation to increase the brightness. Also, even if there is an operation to increase the luminance in a state where the luminance is maximum, the luminance remains at the maximum value.

  Note that when an operation of decreasing or increasing the luminance is performed, the LED may be caused to emit light at the changed luminance. The luminance to be actually output is set in the decoration control processing (step C19). There is a case where the luminance does not follow the player setting value, such as light emission at the time of error, and the output setting is performed according to the situation.

[Minus update processing]
FIG. 84 shows a minus update process (steps C508 and C535) in the above-described hall setting mode process, hall volume adjustment process, hall LED brightness adjustment process, player setting mode process, player volume adjustment process, and player LED brightness adjustment process. , C555, C578, C605, C625). In the minus update process, first, the content of the update area is loaded (step C641), the loaded value is updated by -1 (step C642), and it is determined whether the updated value is smaller than 0 (step C643). .

  If the updated value is not smaller than 0 (Step C643; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (Step C645), and the minus update process ends. If the updated value is smaller than 0 (step C643; Y), the set value after reaching the lower limit is set as the updated value (step C644), and the updated value is saved in the update area (step C644). (Step C645), the minus update process ends.

[Plus update processing]
FIG. 85 shows a plus update process (steps C514 and C541) in the above-described hall setting mode process, hall volume adjustment process, hall LED brightness adjustment process, player setting mode process, player volume adjustment process, and player LED brightness adjustment process. , C561, C584, C611, and C631). In the plus update process, first, the content of the update area is loaded (step C651), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step C652), and it is determined whether the updated value is greater than the upper limit (step C653). .

  If the updated value is not larger than the upper limit (step C653; N), the updated value is saved in the update area (step C655), and the plus update process ends. If the updated value is larger than the upper limit (step C653; Y), the set value after reaching the upper limit is set as the updated value (step C654), and the updated value is saved in the update area. (Step C655), the plus update process ends.

  FIGS. 86 to 97 are program lists showing a partial program structure of the game control program executed by the CPU 111A of the game control device 100. Each program list is a list of instructions in assembly language (source code) corresponding to Z80 which is an 8-bit microprocessor, and is stored in ROM 111b (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions for assembler). Machine code (machine code) to be executed.

  Instructions (codes) in each program list are described from the left side as "line number" added for convenience, "mnemonic" indicating operation contents (operation contents) of instruction, "operand" of instruction target, and convenience of explanation For "comments". The instructions in the program list are basically executed from the top to the bottom of the program list in order of line numbers (from small to large) unless there is an instruction for calling a subroutine or a jump instruction (branch instruction).

  FIG. 86 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 19). The special figure 1 game process corresponds to the label “P_T1GAME_PRC” and is called in step X112 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  The codes of line numbers 1010 and 1020 correspond to the processing of step Y99, the codes of line numbers 1040 to 1080 correspond to the processing of steps Y100 to Y102, and the codes of line numbers 1100 to 1150 correspond to the processing of steps Y103 and Y104. I do.

  Also, the codes of line numbers 1170 to 1210 correspond to the processing of steps Y105 to Y108. The code of line number 1180 corresponds to the process of step Y105, and loads the head address D_T1GAME of the special figure 1 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code in the line number 1190 corresponds to the process in step Y106, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T1SEQCB into the A register. The label R_T1SEQCB indicates an address for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in the RAM 111c. The code of the line number 1200 corresponds to the process of Step Y107, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of the line number 1210 corresponds to the process of step Y108, and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

  FIG. 87 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure 2 game process (FIGS. 20 and 21). The special figure 2 game process corresponds to the label “P_T2GAME_PRC” and is called in step X113 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  The codes of line numbers 1310 and 1320 correspond to the processing of step Y130, and the codes of line numbers 1340 and 1350 correspond to the processing of steps Y131 and Y132. Further, the codes of the line numbers 1370 to 1420 correspond to the processing of steps Y133 and Y134, and the codes of the line numbers 1440 to 1490 correspond to the processing of steps Y135 to Y137.

  Further, the codes of line numbers 1510 to 1550 correspond to the processing of steps Y138 to Y140. The code of the line number 1520 corresponds to the process of step Y138, and loads the head address D_T2GAME of the special figure 2 game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code in line number 1530 corresponds to the process in step Y139, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_T2SEQCB into the A register. The label R_T2SEQCB indicates an address for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RAM 111c. The code of the line number 1540 corresponds to the process of Step Y140, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of the line number 1550 corresponds to the process of step Y141, and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

  FIG. 88 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the fanfare / interval processing (FIG. 42). The fanfare / interval processing corresponds to the label “P_TFAN” and is called in steps Y112 and Y145 of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing.

  The codes of line numbers 1610 and 1620 correspond to the processing of step Y939, the codes of line numbers 1640 and 1650 correspond to the processing of step Y940, and the codes of line numbers 1670 and 1680 correspond to the processing of step Y941.

  The codes of line numbers 1700 to 1750 correspond to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. The code of the line number 1710 corresponds to the process of Step Y942, and loads the head address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit value table into the HL register. The code in line number 1720 corresponds to the process in step Y943, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG indicates an address in the RAM 111c where the round number upper limit information is stored. The code of the line number 1730 corresponds to the process of step Y944, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

  The code in line number 1740 corresponds to the process in step Y945, and stores the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. The label R_ROUND_MAX indicates the head address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c. The code in line number 1750 corresponds to the process in step Y946, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_PNT. The label R_ROUND_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c. The codes of line numbers 1770 to 1790 correspond to the processing of steps Y947 to Y949, and the codes of line numbers 1810 and 1820 correspond to the processing of step Y950.

  FIG. 89 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the general-purpose game process (FIG. 50). The general-purpose game process corresponds to the label “P_FGAME” and is called in step X114 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  The codes of line numbers 1910 and 1920 correspond to the processing of steps B1 and B2, and the codes of line numbers 1940 to 1980 correspond to the processing of steps B3 and B4. The codes of line numbers 2000 to 2040 correspond to the processing of steps B5 to B7. The code of the line number 2010 corresponds to the processing of step B5, and loads the head address D_FGAME of the general-purpose game sequence branch table into the HL register. The code in the line number 2020 corresponds to the process in step B6, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FSEQCB into the A register. The label R_FSEQCB indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing a general-purpose game processing number.

  The code of the line number 2030 corresponds to the process of step B7, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of the line number 2040 corresponds to the process of step B8, and calls a subroutine corresponding to the value of the HL register in which the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is stored.

  FIG. 90 is a program list showing a part of the program structure of the process during normal-drawing display (FIG. 51). The process of displaying the general map corresponds to the label “P_FDISP” and is called in step B11 of the general game process.

  The codes of the line numbers 2110 and 2120 correspond to the processing of steps B501 and B502, and the codes of the line numbers 2140 and 2150 correspond to the processing of step B503. Further, the codes of the line numbers 2170 to 2270 correspond to the processing of steps B504 to B512. The code of the line number 2180 corresponds to the processing of step B504, and hits the HL register to load the head address D_FOPEN_PNT of the middle processing setting table. The code in line number 2190 corresponds to the process in step B505, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF into the A register. The label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing the ordinary symbol stop symbol information. The code of the line number 2200 corresponds to the process of step B506, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

  The code of the line number 2210 corresponds to the process of Step B507, and stores the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL. The label R_FTBL_CTL indicates the start address of the control pointer area during the ordinary drawing in the RAM 111c. The code of the line number 2220 corresponds to the process of step B508, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the address next to the head address of the middle control pointer area indicated by the label R_FTBL_CTL.

  The code of line number 2240 corresponds to the processing of step Y509, and the head address D_FOPEN_TIM of the ordinary power release time table is loaded into the HL register. The code of line number 2250 corresponds to the predetermined value of step Y510, and the numerical value corresponding to the label R_FZ_INF. Into the A register. The label R_FZ_INF indicates an address in the RAM 111c for storing the ordinary symbol stop symbol information. The code of the line number 2260 corresponds to the process of Step Y511, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD. The code of line number 2270 corresponds to the process of step Y512, and the value of the HL register storing the return value from the 2-byte data acquisition process is the address following the head address of the general game processing timer area indicated by the label R_FSEQCB. Is stored in the area.

  FIG. 91 is a program list showing the program structure of the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52). The 2-byte data acquisition process corresponds to the label “P_GET_WORD”, and includes steps Y107, Y140, Y944, and B7 of the special figure 1 game processing, the special figure 2 game processing, the fanfare / interval processing, the general figure game processing, and the general figure displaying processing. , B506, and B511.

  The code of the line number 2310 corresponds to the process of Step Y971, and doubles the value of the A register. The value after the operation is stored in the WA register. The code in line number 2320 corresponds to the process in step Y972, and adds the value of the WA register to the address stored in the HL register. The code in line number 2340 corresponds to the process in step Y973, and loads an address corresponding to the value of the HL register and a value stored at an address obtained by adding +1 to the address to the HL register. Then, at the line number 2360, the process returns to the calling source process.

  That is, there are two arguments to the two-byte data acquisition process, and they are stored in the same register (here, the A register and the HL register) regardless of which process is called. Also, the return value from the two-byte data acquisition process is one, and regardless of which process is called, the return value is put in the same register (here, the HL register) and returned to the original process. ing.

  FIG. 92 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the symbol variation control process (FIG. 53). The symbol change control process corresponds to the label “P_ZGR_CTL” and is called in steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 1 game processing, the special figure 2 game processing, and the general figure game processing.

  The codes of line numbers 2430 to 2460 correspond to the processing of steps Y1401 to Y1403. Further, the codes of the line numbers 2480 and 2490 correspond to the processing of Step Y1404. In the row number 2480, the value of the HL register is updated by +1 to be the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol, and in the row number 2490, the address stored in the HL register and the address are incremented by +1. Load the address value into the HL register. Thus, a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained.

  The codes of the line numbers 2510 to 2530 correspond to the processing of steps Y1405 and Y1406. The code of line number 2510 corresponds to the processing of step Y1405, the value of the DE register is updated by −1, and the address of the target blinking control timer area is set. The code of line number 2520 corresponds to the processing of step Y1406, and the label Call 1-byte subtraction processing corresponding to P_DEC_BYTE. The code of the line number 2530 corresponds to the process of Step Y1407.

  The code of the line number 2550 corresponds to the process of step Y1408, and saves the initial value of the blink control timer (the numerical value corresponding to the label C_ZGR_TIM) in the region (flash control timer region) corresponding to the address stored in the DE register. The code of the line number 2570 corresponds to the process of step Y1409, and the value of the DE register is updated by −1 to be the address of the target variable symbol number area. The code in line number 2580 corresponds to the process in step Y1410, and loads the variable symbol number upper limit determination value (the numerical value corresponding to label C_ZGR_MAX) into the B register. The code in line number 2590 corresponds to the process in step Y1411, and calls the one-byte addition process corresponding to label P_INC_BYTE.

  FIG. 93 is a program list showing the program structure of the one-byte subtraction process (FIG. 54). The one-byte subtraction process corresponds to the label "P_DEC_BYTE", and is called in step Y1406 of the symbol variation control process called in steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 1 game processing, the special figure 2 game processing, and the general figure game processing. It is.

  The codes of the line numbers 2710 and 2720 correspond to the processing of Step Y1421. At line 2710, the value of the address stored in the DE register is loaded into the A register. The DE register stores the address of the target blink control timer area. At the line number 2720, if the value of the A register is 0, the process returns to the calling source.

  The codes of the line numbers 2730 and 2740 correspond to the processing of step Y1422. In the line number 2730, the value of the A register is updated by -1, and in the line number 2740, the value of the A register is updated by the address stored in the DE register. Save to area. As a result, the value of the target blink control timer area is updated by -1.

  FIG. 94 is a program list showing the program structure of the one-byte addition process (FIG. 55). The one-byte addition process corresponds to the label "P_INC_BYTE", and is called at step Y1411 of the symbol variation control process called at steps Y117, Y154, and B16 of the special figure 1 game processing, the special figure 2 game processing, and the general figure game processing. It is.

  The code of the line number 2810 corresponds to the process of step Y1431, and loads the value of the address stored in the DE register into the A register. The DE register stores the address of the target variable symbol number area. The code in the line number 2820 corresponds to the process in step Y1432, and updates the value of the A register by -1.

  The codes of the line numbers 2830 to 2860 correspond to the processing of steps Y1433 and Y1434. At line number 2830, the value of the A register is compared with the value of the B register. The variable register number upper limit determination value is stored in the B register. At line number 2840, if the value of the A register is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to line number 2880 and thereafter. If the value of the A register is the upper limit value, the code of the line number 2860 is executed. The code in line number 2860 corresponds to the process in step Y1434, and the value of the A register is cleared to 0 by taking the exclusive OR of the values of the A register.

  The codes of the line numbers 2880 and 2890 correspond to the processing of step Y1435, and save the value of the A register in the area of the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the value of the target variable symbol number area is updated.

  FIG. 95 is a program list showing the program structure of the effect command setting process (FIG. 56). The effect command setting process corresponds to the label “P_SBCOM_SET” and is called in each process executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The code of the line number 3010 corresponds to the process of step X601, and loads a numerical value into the A register from the port C_TXSTS0 where the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is stored. The codes of the line numbers 3020 to 3040 correspond to the processing of step X602. At the line number 3020, the logical product of the value of the A register and 3FH is calculated, and at the line number 3030, the value of the A register is compared with 20H. In the line number 3040, when the operation result of the line number 3030 is zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is full), the processing returns to the instruction of the line number 3010, and the operation result of the line number 3030 is not zero (Z). In this case (that is, when the transmission buffer is not full), the instruction from line number 3060 is executed.

  The codes of the line numbers 3060 and 3070 correspond to the processing of step X603. At line number 3060, the value of the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data (MODE) is stored in the B register. In the line number 3070, the command data (MODE) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0).

  The code of the line number 3100 corresponds to the process of step X604, and loads a numerical value into the A register from the port C_TXSTS0 in which the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is stored. The codes of the line numbers 3110 to 3130 correspond to the processing of Step X605. At the line number 3110, the logical product of the value of the A register and 3FH is calculated, and at the line number 3120, the value of the A register is compared with 20H. In the line number 3130, when the operation result of the line number 3120 is zero (Z) (that is, when the transmission buffer is full), the processing returns to the instruction of the line number 3100, and the operation result of the line number 3120 is not zero (Z). In this case (that is, when the transmission buffer is not full), the instruction from line number 3150 on is executed.

  The codes of the line numbers 3150 and 3160 correspond to the processing of Step X606. At line number 3150, the value of the B register is loaded into the A register. Command data (ACTION) is stored in the B register. In the line number 3160, the command data (ACTION) stored in the A register is stored in C_TXBUF0 (serial transmission buffer 0). In the line number 3180, the process returns to the calling source process.

  FIG. 96 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 57) mentioned as a modification. The special figure 1 displaying process corresponds to the label “P_T1DISP” and is called in step Y111 of the special figure 1 game process.

  The codes of the line numbers 3210 and 3220 correspond to the processing of steps Y751 and Y752. In the line number 3210, the value of the A register is cleared to 0 by performing an exclusive OR operation on the values of the A register. At the row number 3220, the big hit flag 1 is loaded into the A register by exchanging the value of the big hit flag 1 area (the numerical value corresponding to R_T1HIT_FLG) with the A register, and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared.

  The codes of the line numbers 3240 and 3250 correspond to the processing of Step Y753. At the line number 3240, the value of the A register is compared with the big hit determination value (the value of C_THIT_FLG). I do.

  The codes of the line numbers 3280 and 3290 correspond to the processing of Step Y754 and set the test signal. The codes of line numbers 3310 to 3350 correspond to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946. This processing is the same as the row numbers 1710 to 1750 in FIG.

  The code of the line number 3310 corresponds to the process of Step Y942, and loads the head address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit value table into the HL register. The code in line number 3320 corresponds to the process in step Y943, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG indicates an address in the RAM 111c where the round number upper limit information is stored. The code of the line number 3330 corresponds to the process of Step Y944, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

  The code in line number 3340 corresponds to the process in step Y945, and stores the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. The label R_ROUND_MAX indicates the head address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c. The code in line number 3350 corresponds to the process in step Y946, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_PNT. The label R_ROUND_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

  FIG. 97 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 58) mentioned as a modification. The special figure 2 displaying process corresponds to the label “P_T2DISP” and is called in step Y144 of the special figure 2 game process.

  This is almost the same as the processing during the special figure 1 display shown in FIG. 96, and the codes of the line numbers 3410 and 3420 correspond to the processing of steps Y813 and Y814, and the codes of the line numbers 3440 and 3450 correspond to the processing of step Y815. . The codes of line numbers 3480 and 3490 correspond to the processing of step Y816, and the codes of line numbers 3510 to 3550 correspond to the processing of steps Y942 to Y946.

  The code of the line number 3510 corresponds to the process of step Y942, and loads the head address D_ROUND_MAX of the round number upper limit value table into the HL register. The code at the line number 3520 corresponds to the process at Step Y943, and loads the numerical value corresponding to the label R_ROUND_FLG into the A register. The label R_ROUND_FLG indicates an address in the RAM 111c where the round number upper limit information is stored. The code of the line number 3530 corresponds to the process of Step Y944, and calls a 2-byte data acquisition process corresponding to the label P_GET_WORD.

  The code in line number 3540 corresponds to the process in step Y945, and stores the value of the L register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_MAX. The label R_ROUND_MAX indicates the head address of the round number upper limit area in the RAM 111c. The code in line number 3550 corresponds to the process in step Y946, and stores the value of the H register in the area of the RAM 111c indicated by the label R_ROUND_PNT. The label R_ROUND_PNT indicates the start address of the round LED pointer area in the RAM 111c.

  FIGS. 98 to 108 show a register structure of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 and a program list showing a partial program structure of a game control program executed by the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300. Each program list is a list of instructions in the assembly language (source code) corresponding to the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, and is stored in the PROM 321 (game control program storage means) except for pseudo instructions (instructions to the assembler). One machine language instruction (machine code).

  FIG. 98 shows the structure of a register for CPU 311 of effect control device 300. The CPU 311 includes eight registers ER0 to ER7 each having a 32-bit size. Each of these registers can also be used as a 16-bit or 8-bit size register. For example, ER0 can be used as E0 and R0 (R0H + R0L) having a 16-bit size, and can also be used as R0L and R0H having an 8-bit size.

  Each code of ER0 to ER7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07, and R0L to R7L is a code assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers. In the following description, these codes will be referred to as register addresses for convenience, the register having a numerical part of 0 will be the register of the top address, and the address value will increase in the order in which the numerical value increases in the normal order. . Needless to say, the way of assigning symbols and the order are not limited to these, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the order may be determined in alphabetical order, or the order or address of each register may be determined separately from the numerical value of the reference sign or the alphabetical order.

  FIG. 99 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the hole setting mode process (FIG. 78). The hall setting mode process corresponds to the label “_p_hall_menu” and is called in step C10 in the main process (FIG. 63).

  The codes of the line numbers 5000 to 5020 correspond to the processing of steps C506 to C508. The code of the row number 5000 corresponds to Step C506, and sets the address of the hole setting item area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code in line number 5010 corresponds to step C507, and 9 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size after the lower limit is reached. The code of the line number 5020 corresponds to Step C508, and calls a minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C509, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of the line numbers 5100 to 5130 correspond to the processing of steps C511 to C514. The code of line number 5100 corresponds to step C511, and sets the address of the hole setting item area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code of the line number 5110 corresponds to Step C512, and sets 9 as an upper limit value of the hole setting item in the R1L register in an 8-bit size. The code in line number 5120 corresponds to step C513, and sets 0 as an 8-bit size in the R1H register as the set value after reaching the upper limit. The code of the line number 5130 corresponds to Step C514, and calls a plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. The return value from the plus update processing is returned in the R0L register. In the processing corresponding to step C515 that follows, processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 100 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the hall volume adjustment processing (FIG. 79). The hall volume adjustment processing corresponds to the label “_p_hall_sndvol” and is called in step C516 in the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78).

  The codes in the line numbers 5500 to 5520 correspond to the processing in steps C533 to C535. The code of line number 5500 corresponds to step C533, and sets the address of the hall sound volume area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code in the line number 5510 corresponds to Step C534, and sets 0 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after the lower limit is reached. The code of the line number 5520 corresponds to the step C535, and calls a minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C536, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of line numbers 5600 to 5630 correspond to the processing of steps C538 to C541. The code of line number 5600 corresponds to step C538, and sets the address of the hall sound volume area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code in the line number 5610 corresponds to Step C539, and 9 is set in the R1L register in 8-bit size as the upper limit value of the hall sound volume. The code in line number 5620 corresponds to step C540, and sets 9 as an 8-bit size set value in the R1H register after reaching the upper limit. The code in the line number 5630 corresponds to Step C541, and calls a plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. The return value from the plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C542, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 101 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 80). The hall LED brightness adjustment processing corresponds to the label “_p_hall_ledvol” and is called in step C517 in the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78).

  The codes of line numbers 5700 to 5720 correspond to the processing of steps C553 to C555. The code in line number 5700 corresponds to step C553, and sets the address of the hall LED luminance area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code of the line number 5710 corresponds to Step C554, and 0 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size after the lower limit is reached. The code in the line number 5720 corresponds to Step C555, and calls the minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C556, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of line numbers 5800 to 5830 correspond to the processing of steps C558 to C561. The code of the row number 5800 corresponds to Step C558, and sets the address of the hall LED brightness area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of the line number 5810 corresponds to Step C599, and sets 9 as an upper limit value of the hall LED luminance in the R1L register in an 8-bit size. The code in line number 5820 corresponds to step C560, and sets 9 as an 8-bit size set value in the R1H register after reaching the upper limit. The code in the line number 5830 corresponds to the step C561, and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. The return value from the plus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C562, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 102 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the player setting mode process (FIG. 81). The player setting mode process corresponds to the label “_p_player_menu” and is called in step C11 of the main process (FIG. 63).

  The codes of the line numbers 6000 to 6020 correspond to the processing of steps C576 to C578. The code of the line number 6000 corresponds to Step C576, and sets the address of the player setting item area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of the line number 6010 corresponds to Step C577, and 2 is set in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after the lower limit is reached. The code of the line number 6020 corresponds to the step C578, and calls a minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C579, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of the line numbers 6100 to 6130 correspond to the processing of steps C581 to C584. The code of the line number 6100 corresponds to Step C581, and sets the address of the player setting item area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of the line number 6110 corresponds to Step C582, and sets 2 as an upper limit value of the player setting item in the R1L register in an 8-bit size. The code in line number 6120 corresponds to step C583, and sets 0 in the R1H register in 8-bit size as the set value after the upper limit has been reached. The code of the line number 6130 corresponds to the step C584, and calls a plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. The return value from the plus update processing is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C585, the processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 103 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82). The player volume adjustment process corresponds to the label “_p_player_sndvol” and is called in step C586 in the player setting mode process (FIG. 81).

  The codes of line numbers 6200 to 6220 correspond to the processing of steps C603 to C605. The code of the line number 6200 corresponds to Step C603, and sets the address of the player volume area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of the line number 6210 corresponds to Step C604, and sets 0 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after the lower limit is reached. The code of the line number 6220 corresponds to Step C605, and calls a minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C606, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of line numbers 6300 to 6330 correspond to the processing of steps C608 to C611. The code of line number 6300 corresponds to step C608, and sets the address of the player volume area in the ER0 register in 32-bit size. The code in line number 6310 corresponds to step C609, and 9 is set in the R1L register as an 8-bit size as the upper limit of the player volume. The code in the line number 6320 corresponds to Step C610, and 9 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size after the upper limit is reached. The code in the line number 6330 corresponds to Step C611, and calls the plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. Note that the return value from the plus update processing is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent processing corresponding to step C612, processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 104 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the player LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 83). The player LED brightness adjustment processing corresponds to the label “_p_player_ledvol” and is called in step C587 in the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81).

  The codes of line numbers 6400 to 6420 correspond to the processing of steps C623 to C625. The code of the line number 6400 corresponds to Step C623, and sets the address of the player LED brightness area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code of the row number 6410 corresponds to Step C624, and sets 0 in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as a set value after the lower limit is reached. The code of the line number 6420 corresponds to the step C625, and calls a minus update process corresponding to the label “_p_downcount”. The return value from the minus update process is returned in the R0L register, and in the subsequent process corresponding to step C626, the process is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  The codes of line numbers 6500 to 6530 correspond to the processing of steps C628 to C631. The code of the line number 6500 corresponds to Step C628, and sets the address of the player LED luminance area in the ER0 register in a 32-bit size. The code in the line number 6510 corresponds to Step C629, and 9 is set in the R1L register in an 8-bit size as the upper limit of the player LED luminance. The code in line number 6520 corresponds to step C630, and 9 is set in the R1H register as an 8-bit size after the upper limit has been reached. The code of the line number 6530 corresponds to Step C631, and calls a plus update process corresponding to the label “_p_upcount”. Note that the return value from the plus update processing is returned in the R0L register, and in the processing corresponding to step C632 that follows, processing is performed using the value of the R0L register.

  FIG. 105 is a program list showing the program structure of the minus update process (FIG. 84). The minus update process corresponds to the label “_p_downcount”, and the minus in the above-mentioned hall setting mode process, hall volume adjustment process, hall LED brightness adjustment process, player setting mode process, player volume adjustment process, and player LED brightness adjustment process. It is called in the update processing (steps C508, C535, C555, C578, C605, C625).

  The codes of the line numbers 7000 and 7010 correspond to Step C641. At the row number 7000, the value of the ER2 register is saved in an area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register. At the row number 7010, the value is loaded from the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register into the R2L register. This loads the R2L register with the value corresponding to the currently selected item. The code in the line number 7020 corresponds to Step C642, and updates the value of the R2L register by -1.

  The codes of the line numbers 7030 to 7040 correspond to the processing of steps C643 and C644. In the line number 7030, if the updated value of the R2L register is 0 or more, that is, if the value is within the range of the value corresponding to the item, the processing from the line number 7050 corresponding to the label L1234 is performed. The code in line number 7040 corresponds to the process in step C644. If the determination result in line number 7030 is less than 0, that is, if the value is outside the range of the value corresponding to the item, the set value after reaching the lower limit is stored. The stored value of the R1L register is stored in the R2L register.

  The codes of line numbers 7050 to 7070 correspond to the process of step C645. In line number 7060, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. I do. At the line number 7070, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, in the line number 7080, the information of the saved ER2 is restored, and the process returns to the calling source.

  FIG. 106 is a program list showing the program structure of the plus update process (FIG. 85). The plus update process corresponds to the label “_p_upcount”, and is used in the above-described hall setting mode process, hall volume adjustment process, hall LED brightness adjustment process, player setting mode process, player volume adjustment process, and player LED brightness adjustment process. It is called in the update processing (steps C514, C541, C561, C584, C611, and C631).

  The codes of the line numbers 7100 and 7110 correspond to Step C651. At the row number 7100, the value of the ER2 register is saved in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and at the row number 7110, the value is loaded from the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register into the R2L register. This loads the R2L register with the value corresponding to the currently selected item. The code in the row number 7120 corresponds to Step C652, and updates the value of the R2L register by +1.

  The codes of the line numbers 7130 to 7150 correspond to the processing of steps C653 and C654. In the line number 7130, the value of the R1L register storing the upper limit value is compared with the value of the R2L register. In the line number 7140, if the comparison result is within the range of the value corresponding to the item, the line number corresponding to the label L2345 The processing after 7160 is performed. The code in line number 7150 corresponds to the process in step C654. If the comparison result in line number 7140 is out of the range of the value corresponding to the item, the value in the R1H register storing the set value after the upper limit is reached is stored. Store in R2L register.

  The codes of line numbers 7160 to 7180 correspond to the process of step C655, and in line number 7170, the value corresponding to the updated item stored in the R2L register is stored in the area corresponding to the address stored in the ER0 register. I do. At line number 7180, the value of the R2L register is stored in the R0L register. After that, at the line number 7190, the information of the saved ER2 is restored, and the process returns to the caller.

  FIG. 107 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the random number processing. The random number process corresponds to the label “_rand”, is called in the random number update process (step C12) in the above-described main process, and is a process for generating a random number.

  At line number 7200, the value from the random number seed area “_r_rand_seed” is loaded into the ER0 register. At line number 7210, the value of 41C64E6D in hexadecimal is loaded into the ER1 register. At line number 7230, the value of the ER1 register is multiplied by the value of the ER0 register, and the result is stored in the ER0 register.

  After that, various operations are performed. In the row number 7260, the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER1 register and stored in the ER1 register. In the row number 7270, the value of 80 in hexadecimal is stored in the R1H register. At the line number 7280, a range correction process corresponding to the label “_hosei” is called. At the row number 7290, the value of the R1 register storing the return value from the range correction processing is stored in the R0 register. At the row number 7300, the processing returns to the caller random number updating processing.

  FIG. 108 is a program list showing a partial program structure of the range correction processing. The range correction process corresponds to the label “_hosei”, is called in the above-described random number process, and is a process for correcting the range of the random numbers.

  At line number 7400, the value of the ER2 register is saved to an area corresponding to the address stored in the ER7 register, and at line number 7410, the value of the ER0 register is loaded into the ER2 register. At line number 7420, the value of the ER0 register is divided by the value of the ER1 register, and the quotient is stored in the ER0 register.

  After that, various operations are performed. In the row number 7450, the value of the ER1 register is subtracted from the value of the ER2 register, and the result is stored in the ER2 register. In the row number 7460, the value of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register. As a result, the operation result of the ER2 register is stored in the ER1 register as a return value. In the line number 7470, the process returns to the random number process of the caller.

  The control processes performed by the game control device 100 and the production control device 300 include those in which one control process is called in response to a call command executed in another control process. I have. FIG. 109 shows an example of the relationship between such control processes. In this relationship, when one control process is called in response to a call command executed in another control process, one control process is in a lower group than another control process. Set the group to belong to. In the case of a control process having a plurality of call sources, it is assumed that the control process belongs to a lower group with respect to the lowest group among the groups to which the control processes listed as the call sources belong.

  The relationship shown in FIG. 109A indicates that the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the first control process is different from the first and second control processes. It is possible to call a different third control process. Then, the second control process and the third control process can call a fourth control process different from the first to third control processes. Note that the first control process may call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, or the fifth control process may call the fourth control process. Is also good. Further, the first control process may be able to directly call the fourth control process.

  In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second, third, and fifth control processes called by the first control process belong to the second group. The fourth control process called by the control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is used as the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is used as the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21). ) Can be associated with the third control process, the 2-byte data acquisition process (FIG. 52) can be associated with the fourth control process, and the general-purpose game process (FIG. 50) can be associated with the fifth control process.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is used as the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is used as the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, 21) can be associated with the third control processing, and the fanfare / interval processing (FIG. 42) can be associated with the fourth control processing.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is used as the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is used as the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 20, 21) can be associated with the third control process, the symbol variation control process (FIG. 53) can be associated with the fourth control process, and the general-purpose game process (FIG. 50) can be associated with the fifth control process. The 1-byte subtraction process (FIG. 54) and the 1-byte addition process (FIG. 55) can be a sixth control process different from the first to fifth control processes, and the fourth control process can call the sixth control process. It can be said that

  Further, the effect command setting processing (FIG. 56) that may be called from a plurality of control processings can be associated as the fourth control processing. For example, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is used as the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is used as the second control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21) is used as the third control processing. , The normal map game process (FIG. 50) is associated with the fifth control process, and the second, third, and fifth control processes call control processes (for example, the special map 1 normal process, the special map 2 normal process). , Each of which is shown in FIG. 56, and the effect command setting process (FIG. 56) called from the sixth to eighth control processes can be associated as a fourth control process. is there.

  In the processing by the effect control device 300, the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is used as the first control processing, the hall volume adjustment processing (FIG. 79) is used as the second control processing, and the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 80) is used as the second control processing. The minus control process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) can be associated with the fourth control process, and the liquid crystal brightness adjustment process (step C518) can be associated with the fifth control process.

  In the processing performed by the effect control device 300, the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81) is used as the first control processing, the player volume adjustment processing (FIG. 82) is used as the second control processing, and the player LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 82). 83) can be associated with the third control process, and the minus update process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) can be associated with the fourth control process.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, a register for storing an argument or a return value is specified regardless of the above relationship. As registers for storing arguments, for example, A registers and HL registers are mainly used as shown in line numbers 1180 and 1190 in FIG. 86. For example, as registers for storing return values as shown in line number 2340 in FIG. Mainly uses an HL register. That is, the register for storing the argument and the return value is determined for each control process regardless of the group to which the control process belongs.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 has few registers that can be used, and sets registers to be used irrespective of the group so that limited registers can be used efficiently. In addition, when a register to be used is determined for each group, a process of moving a value between registers when storing a return value is required. However, in the game control device 100, the capacity of the ROM 111B is limited, so that the same register is used regardless of the group and the process of moving a value between registers becomes unnecessary, and the program capacity is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, the groups set as described above are basically associated with the registers used by the control processing of each group. In the present embodiment, the order of the group and the order of the register correspond to each other. The order of the groups is such that the first group is the highest, the second group, the third group,... The order of the registers is such that the R0 register is the highest order, the R1 register, the R2 register,... Note that the R0 register may correspond to the start address of the register, or may not be the start address. The order and order of the addresses of the registers may correspond or may not correspond.

  For example, the control process belonging to the third group mainly uses the R2 register, and the control process belonging to the second group, which is a higher group of the third group, mainly uses the upper R1 register of the R2 register. I have. In the control processing belonging to the first group, which is the higher group of the second group, the upper R0 register of the R1 register is mainly used.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), a register corresponding to the group of the caller is used as a register for storing the return value to the control processing of the caller. For example, in the random number process (FIG. 107) called for the random number update process (step C12) and the range correction process (FIG. 108) called for the random number process, the random number update process belongs to the first group, and the random number process belongs to the second group. , And the range correction process belongs to the third group. In this relationship, in the range correction processing belonging to the third group, processing is mainly performed using the R2 register, and finally, the return value is transferred from the R2 register to the R1 register (line number 7460). In the random number processing belonging to the second group, processing is mainly performed using the R1 register, and finally, the return value is transferred from the R1 register to the R0 register (line number 7290).

  Also, in principle, in the control processing belonging to the third group, the return value is stored in the R1 register, but in the minus update processing shown in FIG. 105 and the plus update processing shown in FIG. 106, the return value is returned as shown in FIG. The value is stored in the R0 register. This is because the minus update process and the plus update process are also called from the control processes belonging to the first group. In such a case, the return value is stored in a register used by the highest group among the groups to which the control process of the caller belongs. Therefore, in the minus update process and the plus update process, the return value is stored in the R0 register used by the control process belonging to the first group.

  Correspondingly, in the hall setting mode process shown in FIG. 99 belonging to the first group and the player setting mode process shown in FIG. 102, when calling the minus update process and plus update process belonging to the third group, The argument is stored in the R1 register which is a register used by the process belonging to the second group. That is, the argument is stored in a register used by a group one level higher than the group to which the called process belongs.

  In the effect control device 300, since the capacity of the register of the CPU 311 and the capacity of the PROM 321 have room, the register to be used in this way can be determined in advance. By preliminarily determining the registers to be used for each group to which the control processing belongs, the registers to be used in the control processing are naturally determined in the development of each control processing, and the development efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the current hierarchy can be determined by looking at the address of the return value during development, the efficiency of development can be improved in a manner that is easy to understand when the program is looked back later or when viewed by others. Further, for example, when the register of the return value and the register used for processing match, it may be necessary to temporarily store the return value in the RAM, but by defining the register used for the return value by a group. It is not necessary to perform such processing.

  Although the registers having the same rank as the rank of the group are used, lower registers may be used as the group becomes lower, and the registers do not necessarily have to have the same rank. In other words, when the control processing is deep (the order of the groups is low), it is highly possible that the register near the beginning (the register with the highest order) is used. Just do it. The higher the layer, the more the first register becomes available, so it can be used. In other words, the deeper the hierarchy of control processing (the lower the rank of a group), the more distant the register from the top address (the lower the order of the register) is the return value, and the lower the hierarchy of the control processing, the closer the register to the top address. Just use it.

  Further, the criteria for grouping are not limited to those based on the relationship between the call commands, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the control processing included in the special figure 1 game processing may be a first group, the control processing included in the special figure 2 game processing may be a second group, and the control processing included in the general figure game processing may be a third group. . Further, the first to third groups may be further divided into groups. Then, the group thus divided may be associated with the register to be used.

  Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 109 (c), for a control process called from a plurality of groups having different ranks, the register for storing the return value is set to a register corresponding to the group of the control process of the caller. May be. For example, in the case of the minus update process and the plus update process, when the caller is the hall setting mode process or the player setting mode process belonging to the first group, the return value is stored in the R0 register, and the caller is in the second group. In the case of a hall volume adjustment process or the like belonging to, the return value may be stored in the R1 register.

  Further, regardless of the group to which the control process belongs, the register closest to the head may be preferentially used as a return value. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), when there is one return value, the return value is stored in the R0 register, and when there are two return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register and the R1 register is stored. To store the second return value. When there are three return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register.

  When there are a plurality of return values, even if the size of each return value is small and can be accommodated in a register of the same group (same hierarchy), the return value is stored in a register of a different group (hierarchy) as described above. For example, even if two return values are respectively assigned as R0L and R0H in 1-byte size, the first is stored in R0L and the second is stored in R1L.

  If there are four or more return values, the first return value is stored in the R0 register, the second return value is stored in the R1 register, and the third return value is stored in the R2 register. Further, the fourth and subsequent return values are stored in the RAM 322. The number of return values starting to use the RAM 322 for storing the return value is not limited to four, and can be set to any number. For example, even if the return value is one, the return value may be stored in the RAM 322 without using a register. Alternatively, the return value may be stored in the RAM 322 when the return value is 8 or more. Further, a stack area may be used instead of or in combination with the RAM 322.

  Since there are limits on the types of registers, it may be difficult to determine the registers to be used for each group if the number of groups is large (the hierarchy is deep), but if you always use them from the beginning, you will run out of registers Can be avoided. Further, by using another area such as the RAM 322, it is possible to cope with any number of return values.

  Also, the arguments can be used in the same order of use of registers as the return value, and when there are a plurality of arguments, the register closest to the top is used preferentially as described above. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, the arguments for calling the minus update processing are stored in the order of ER0 and R1L. That is, registers 0, 1 and so on are used. In this case, if there are more than a predetermined number of arguments, another area such as the RAM 322 may be used together. In the processing shown in FIGS. 99 to 104, arguments for calling the plus update processing are stored in the order of ER0, R1L, R1H. As described above, two registers of the same hierarchy may be used in order, or registers of different layers may be used one by one as described above.

  In FIG. 109 (d), the registers to be used are shown as Rx (x is a number). However, the same applies to any of the systems ERx, Ex, Rx, RxH, and RxL in the register structure shown in FIG. Can be used. Further, registers of different systems may be used in any combination. For example, R0, E1, ER2, R3H, R3L, R4L... May be used in this order. In addition, one system may be used from the beginning such that E0 to E7 are used after using R0 to R7, and the system may be used from the beginning of another system when all are used. In this case, only a part of each system may be used, such as R4, R5, R6, E3, E4, E5, E6, and E7.

  In addition, although they are used sequentially from the head, they may be used sequentially from the rear end. The order of registers used for return values and the order of registers used for arguments may be the same or different. Also, the order of registers used for arguments and return values may be determined according to the group set for each control process. For example, when a control process in which a group to which the control process belongs is called, an argument is stored in a register in accordance with the order set corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs.

  Based on the above, the control means for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result ( Effect control device 300), the control means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers, and one control process is called in response to a call command executed in another control process. When the return value returned by one control process to another control process is stored in a register, the return value is stored in each of the plurality of registers according to a predetermined order. . Therefore, when developing each control process, the register used in the control process is determined by itself, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the control means sets the order in the order of the reference numerals assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers. Therefore, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the code | symbol attached in order to identify each of several registers is each code | symbol of ER0 to ER7, E0 to E7, R0 to R7, R0H to R07, and R0L to R7L in the said embodiment. The register in which the numeral portion of the code is 0 is the first register, and the order is set such that the order in which the value of the numeral portion increases is the normal order. Therefore, in the above embodiment, it can be said that the control means sets the order from the head of the register in the order of the address of the register.

  In addition, a control means (effect control device) for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. 300), the control means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers, and a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to control, and one control processing is replaced by another control processing. When one control process stores a return value to be returned to another control process in a register when the relationship is called in response to a call instruction to be executed, a predetermined value is stored in each of the plurality of registers. Return values are stored according to the rank, and when there are more than a predetermined number of return values, up to a predetermined number of return values are stored in a plurality of registers according to the rank, and at least a predetermined number of return values are stored. The fact that so as to store the 憶 means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with an increase in the return value.

  In addition, a control means (effect control device) for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. 300), and the control means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers, and stores, in the register, an argument set when one control processing executes a call instruction and calls another control processing. In this case, the data is stored in each of the plurality of registers according to a predetermined order. Therefore, when developing each control process, the register used in the control process is determined by itself, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the control means sets the order in the order of the reference numerals assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers. Therefore, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, the control means includes a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information relating to the control. When there are a predetermined number or more of arguments, the control means stores the predetermined number of arguments in a plurality of registers in accordance with the order, and stores the predetermined number of arguments. This means that more than two arguments are stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with an increase in the return value.

  In addition, a control means (effect control device) for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result. 300), the control means includes an arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers, and for some or all of the plurality of control processing, the group to which each control processing belongs is set to one of the plurality of groups. When a predetermined group to which a group belongs executes a control process, a register corresponding to the group to which the control process belongs is used. Therefore, when developing each control process, the register used in the control process is determined by itself, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, the control means pre-determines the order of each of the plurality of groups, pre-determines the order of each of the plurality of registers, and one control process corresponds to a call instruction executed in another control process. For those that are called, one control process belongs to a group lower than the other control processes, and when the control process to which the group belongs is performed, the control process This means that the register of the order corresponding to the order is used. Therefore, when developing each control process, the register used in the control process is determined by itself, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, it is easy to grasp which value is stored in which register, so that the program can be easily verified and the development efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, when one control process returns a value to another control process, the control means returns a value using a register of an order corresponding to the order of the group to which the one control process belongs. . Therefore, it is only necessary to set the register for storing the return value in accordance with the group, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, a control means (game control device) for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. 100, an effect control device 300), and the control means includes a first control process, a second control process called in response to a first call command executed in the first control process, and a first control process. A third control process called in response to the second call instruction to be executed and a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process and the third control process can be executed. It will be. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  The control means may include a fifth control process called in response to a fourth call instruction executed in the first control process, and a fifth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the fifth control process. 4 control processing can be executed. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIG. 110A, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process is different from the first and second control processes. The third control process can be called, and the first control process can directly call the third control process. Then, a fourth control process different from the first to third control processes can call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the fifth control process executes the third control process. In addition to being able to call, the fourth control process can directly call the third control process.

  In this relationship, the first control process and the fourth control process belong to the first group, and the second and fifth control processes called by the control processes belonging to the first group belong to the second group. The third control process called by the control process belonging to the second group belongs to the third group.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, the modified examples shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 correspond to the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) as the first control processing and the special figure 1 displaying processing (FIG. 57). In the second control processing, the 2-byte data acquisition processing (FIG. 52) is used as the third control processing, the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21) is used as the fourth control processing, and the special figure 2 displaying processing (FIG. 58). ) Can be associated with the fifth control process.

  Further, the effect command setting processing (FIG. 56) which may be called from a plurality of control processings can be associated as the third control processing. For example, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is associated with the first control processing, and the special figure 2 game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21) is associated with the fourth control processing. Are called second and fifth control processes (not shown), respectively, and the effect command setting process (FIG. 7) called from the second and fifth control processes. 56) can be associated as a third control process. It should be noted that the general-purpose game process (FIG. 50) is associated with the fourth control process, the general-purpose normal process called by the general-purpose game process is defined as a fifth control process, and the effect command setting process ( FIG. 56) can be associated as the third control process.

  In the processing of the effect control device 300, the hall setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is updated to the first control processing, the hall volume adjustment processing (FIG. 79) and the hall LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 80) are updated to the second control processing, and the minus update is performed. The process (FIG. 84) and the plus update process (FIG. 85) are used as a third control process, the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) is used as a fourth control process, and the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) is used as a fifth control process. In addition, the player LED brightness adjustment processing (FIG. 83) can be associated with the fifth control processing.

  Note that the third control process may be any one that is commonly called from the first control process and the second control process, which are groups different from the third control process. Therefore, in the process of calling the third control process from the first control process, a call of one or more stages of the control process may be interposed, or the first control process may be interposed between the first control process and the second control process. One or more steps of control processing may be interposed between the control processing and the third control processing.

  Based on the above, the control means for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result ( Game control device 100, effect control device 300), and the control means includes a first control process, a second control process called in response to a first call command executed in the first control process, and a first control process. And the third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the process and the second control process. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, a control means (game control device) for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. 100, an effect control device 300), the control means comprising: a first control process; a second control process called in response to a first call command executed in the first control process; A fourth control process different from the second control process, a fifth control process called in response to a second call instruction executed in the fourth control process, a first control process, a second control process, and a fourth control process. And a third control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the process and the fifth control process. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 110B, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process as the A process in the first period, and the second control process performs the first control process. And a third control process different from the second control process can be called, and the first control process can directly call the third control process.

  In this relationship, the first control process belongs to the first group, and the second and third control processes called by the first control process belong to the second group. The fourth, fifth, and sixth control processes called by the control processes belonging to the second group belong to the third group.

  In a second period different from the first period, as the B process, the first control process can call a second control process different from the first control process, and the second control process performs the first and second control processes. It is possible to call a third control process different from the process. The second control process can call a fifth control process different from the first to fourth control processes, and the third control process can call a sixth control process different from the first to fifth control processes. It is possible.

  In the processing in the game control device 100, as the A processing in the first period, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is used as the first control processing, the special figure 1 game processing (FIG. 19) is used as the second control processing, and the special figure 2 is used. The game processing (FIGS. 20 and 21) can be associated with the third control processing, and the fanfare / interval processing (FIG. 42) can be associated with the fourth control processing. That is, the first period is a period during which the special game state is being executed. Then, as the B processing in the second period, the special figure 1 change start processing (FIG. 24A) is changed to the fifth control processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing (FIG. 24B) is changed to the sixth control processing. Can be assigned. That is, the second period is a period during the execution of the special figure change display game.

  Note that the first period and the second period are not limited to those described above. For example, it may be further subdivided into a period of a fanfare or a period of a round in the special gaming state, and the number of periods may be three or more.

  Further, the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78) and the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) can be called in response to the call command executed in the main process (FIG. 63). As described above, the hall setting mode process (FIG. 78) and the player setting mode process (FIG. 81) can each invoke control processes having a relationship as shown in FIG. 109 (a). It can be said that these are collectively related as shown in FIG.

  That is, in the processing in the effect control device 300, the main processing (FIG. 63) is associated with the first control processing, the hole setting mode processing (FIG. 78) is associated with the second control processing, and the player setting mode processing (FIG. 81) is associated with the third control process. The hall volume adjustment process (FIG. 79) or the hall LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 80) is associated with the fourth control process, and the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83) is performed. Correspond to the fifth control process. Then, the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 85) can be associated with the sixth control process. The sixth control process can be called from the second control process and the third control process without going through the fourth control process and the fifth control process.

  Based on the above, the control means for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result ( Effect control device 300), and the control means executes the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first control process. A third control process called in response to the second call instruction; a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process; and a fourth control process executed in the third control process. A fifth control process called in response to the call instruction; and a sixth control process called in response to the fifth call instruction executed in the fourth control process and the fifth control process. Become. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification can execute a specific effect in which the content is changed according to the operation input of the player.

  FIG. 111 shows an example of the specific effect in the present modification. In this specific production, if the character 80 can make a tee shot and make a hole-in-one, it is a production that indicates a big hit. The player can adjust the strength of the shot performed by the character 80 by operating the touch panel 29.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (a), in the specific effect, an explanation display 81 explaining the contents of the effect is displayed at the upper center of the display area. Further, a meter display 82 indicating the strength of the force that changes according to the operation of the touch panel 29 is displayed in the left part of the display area. In the meter display 82, the center is set to the reference value, and the more the meter extends upward, the greater the force is greater than the reference value, and the more the meter extends downward, the less the force is less than the reference value. It shows.

  An operation instruction display 83 indicating the operation method of the touch panel 29 is displayed at the lower center of the display area, and an operable time display 84 indicating the operable time is displayed above the operation instruction display 83. The operable time is set so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends after the specific effect ends.

  Further, a start storage display section 86 for displaying the start storage number is provided in a lower right portion of the display area. In the start storage display section 86, the left numerical value indicates the first start stored number, and the right numerical value indicates the second start stored number. Further, below the start storage display section 86, there is provided a decoration special figure variation display game display section 88 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game.

  When the operable time period ends as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the operation explanation display 83 and the operable time display 84 disappear. Here, the meter display 82 indicates that an operation has been performed so that a shot is performed with a force three steps stronger than the reference value. Thereafter, when the character makes a shot and the result of the special figure change display game is out of order, an effect is performed in which the ball does not enter the cup as shown in FIG. 111 (c). In this effect, since the operation was performed so as to make a shot with a stronger force than the reference value, an effect is performed in which the ball comes off beyond the cup. If the operation has been performed so as to make a shot with a weaker force than the reference value, an effect is produced in which the ball comes off without reaching the cup. Of course, an effect that deviates regardless of whether the adjusted force is stronger or weaker than the reference value may be selected. In addition, when the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), an effect in which the ball enters the cup is performed, and a special result is derived. The meter display 82 continues to be displayed until the effects of FIGS. 111 (c) and (d) showing the result of the specific effect are completed.

  Note that the specific effect is performed in one special figure variable display game, but may be performed across a plurality of special figure variable display games. For example, an operable time spanning a plurality of special figure change display games may be set, and the result of the special figure change display game in which the operable time ends may be indicated or reported. In this case, the result of the specific effect may be determined according to the look-ahead result at the start of the specific effect, or the result may be determined based on the result of the special figure change display game when the operable time ends. The result of the special effect may be determined, or the result of the specific effect may be determined based on the result of the special figure variable display game at the start of the special figure variable display game in which the operable time ends. May be.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main processing shown in FIG. 112 is performed instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In the main process, a specific effect process for performing the process related to the specific effect as described above is performed (step C701).

(Specific production processing)
FIG. 113 shows a specific effect process called in response to the call command executed in the above-described main process. In this specific effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not an adjustment (such as a force of a shot) in the specific effect is possible by the operation of the player (step C711). When it is not in the adjustable state (Step C711; N), the specific effect processing ends. If it is in the adjustable state (step C711; Y), it is determined whether there is an operation of lowering the meter (step C712). The operation of lowering the meter is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29.

  When there is no operation of lowering the meter (Step C712; N), the process proceeds to Step C718. If the operation of lowering the meter has been performed (step C712; Y), the address of the effect meter area for storing the value to be displayed on the meter display 82 is prepared (step C713), and the lower limit value of the meter is prepared (step C713). (Step C714), a set value after reaching the lower limit (here, the lower limit) is prepared (step C715). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C716), and effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C717). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG. As a result, the meter is lowered on the meter display 82 every time there is an operation of lowering the meter. Also, even if there is an operation of lowering the meter when the meter is at the minimum, the value remains at the minimum value.

  Next, it is determined whether there is an operation to raise the meter (step C718). The operation of raising the meter is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no operation of raising the meter (Step C718; N), the specific effect processing ends. When the operation of raising the meter has been performed (step C718; Y), the address of the effect meter area is prepared (step C719), the upper limit value of the meter is prepared (step C720), and the set value after reaching the upper limit is set. (Here, the upper limit value) is prepared (step C721).

  Then, plus update processing is performed (step C722), and effect meter display information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C723). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG. As a result, every time there is an operation to raise the meter, the meter is raised in the meter display 82. In addition, even if there is an operation of raising the meter when the meter is in the maximum state, the value remains at the maximum value. If there is an operation of lowering or raising the meter, the operation sound may be output at a volume corresponding to the value of the meter.

  Note that the specific effect involving the operation of the player as described above is not limited to the effect performed during the execution of the special figure variable display game. For example, if the special game state is executed over a plurality of rounds and the player can operate and increase the meter to a certain amount / maximum, a high probability state or a small hit RUSH state is entered. It can be an effect that suggests or informs.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be described. Basically, the gaming machine has the same configuration as that of the gaming machine of the above-described first modified example. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted. The parts will be described. The gaming machine according to the present modification allows a player to set adjustable items in a specific effect.

  FIG. 114 shows an example of the specific effect in this modification. Basically, it is the same as the specific effect in the first modified example, but the player himself can select items that can be adjusted by the player. This selection is made in a player setting selection mode as shown in FIG. 120 (b), and the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, which are adjustment items that can be adjusted by the player in the specific effect. Whether or not the type can be adjusted can be selected. In the “adjustment method 1”, the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item can be adjusted. In the “adjustment method 2”, only the first adjustment item can be adjusted. In the “adjustment method 3”, only the second adjustment item is adjusted. It is possible, and in the “adjustment method 4”, both adjustment items cannot be adjusted.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows a case where the adjustment method 1 is selected, and enables adjustment by increasing the force of the first adjustment item and decreasing by adjusting the force of the second adjustment item. FIG. 114 (b) shows a case where the adjustment method 2 is selected, in which only the adjustment for reducing the force of the first adjustment item is enabled. Adjustment to increase the force of the second adjustment item is not possible, and a concealment display 85 for concealing the meter display is provided in a portion displaying the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item. In the concealment display 85, it is possible to execute a suggestion and a notification about the special figure change display game. Further, in this case, only the operation in the lower area of the touch panel 29 is possible, but if the operation in the lower area of the touch panel 29 is further performed while the force is set to the minimum value, the force returns to the reference value. I have. Of course, the upper and lower areas of the touch panel 29 may be operated, and the operation of increasing or decreasing the force within a range equal to or less than the reference value may be made possible.

  FIG. 114 (c) shows a case in which the adjustment method 3 is selected, and allows only the adjustment for increasing the force of the second adjustment item. Adjustment for reducing the force of the first adjustment item is not possible, and a concealment display 85 for concealing the meter display is provided in a portion where the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment item is displayed. Further, in this case, only the operation in the upper area of the touch panel 29 is possible. However, when the operation in the upper area of the touch panel 29 is further performed while the force is at the maximum value, the force returns to the reference value. I have. Of course, the upper and lower areas of the touch panel 29 may be operated, and the operation of increasing or decreasing the force in a range equal to or more than the reference value may be made possible.

  FIG. 114 (d) shows a case where the adjustment method 4 is selected, in which adjustment for decreasing the force of the first adjustment item and adjustment for increasing the force of the second adjustment item are disabled. A concealment display 85 for concealing the meter display is provided in a portion where the meter display 82 is displayed.

[Hall setting mode processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, in this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 115 is performed instead of the hole setting mode processing shown in FIG. In the hole setting mode process, a custom setting process (step C731) for performing a process related to a custom setting for setting whether or not the above-described adjustment method can be selected is performed.

[Custom setting processing]
FIG. 116 shows a custom setting process called in response to a calling command executed in the above-described hole setting mode process. In this custom setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the custom setting is possible (step C741). The state in which the custom setting can be performed means that the custom setting item displayed as the selectable item in the present modification is selected on the hole setting screen and the selection screen as shown in FIG. 120A is displayed. is there.

  If the custom setting is not possible (step C741; N), the custom setting process ends. If the custom setting is possible (step C741; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (step C742). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C742; N), the process moves to step C747. If the upward cursor operation has been performed (step C742; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C743), and the set value after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C744). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C745), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C746). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG.

  In the custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120A, values of “valid”, “invalid”, and “return” are associated with each other, and the items are arranged in ascending order from the top. Note that “valid” is a setting that allows the player to select the adjustment content in the specific effect, and “invalid” is a setting that the player cannot select the adjustment content in the specific effect. Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, an item with a smaller corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward on the custom setting screen. If the cursor operation is performed in the state where the item with the smallest value is selected (the item displayed at the top of the custom setting screen has the cursor), the item with the largest value is selected and the custom value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the setting screen.

  Returning to FIG. 116, it is next determined whether or not a downward cursor operation has been performed (step C747). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. When there is no downward cursor operation (Step C747; N), the process shifts to Step C753. If the downward cursor operation has been performed (step C747; Y), the address of the custom setting item area is prepared (step C748), and the upper limit value of the custom setting item is prepared (step C749). Is prepared (step C750). Then, plus update processing is performed (step C751), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C752). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG.

  Each time a downward cursor operation is performed, an item with a larger corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the custom setting screen. In addition, when the item with the largest value is selected (when the cursor is located at the item displayed at the bottom of the custom setting screen), if the downward cursor operation is performed, the item with the smallest value is selected and the custom value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top of the setting screen.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a fixing operation has been performed (step C753). The confirmation operation is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 in a state where the cursor is located on any of the “valid” and “invalid” items. If there is no confirmation operation (step C753; N), the custom setting process ends. Note that it is assumed that there is no operation for touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 even when the cursor is located at the item of “return”, and there is no determination operation. If there is a confirmation operation (step C753; Y), it is determined whether the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting a valid item (step C754).

  If the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting a valid item (step C754; Y), a target flag is set in order to set a custom flag for setting whether or not custom setting is possible (a state in which custom setting is possible). The ON setting process (step C755), which is a common process, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process ends. If the operation is not a confirmation operation by selecting a valid item (step C754; N), that is, if the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting an “invalid” item, a custom flag for setting whether or not to perform custom setting is set. In order to clear (in a state where custom setting is not possible), an OFF setting process (step C756), which is a common process for clearing the target flag, is called and executed, and then the custom setting process ends. That is, in the custom setting process, the setting selected during the process is determined.

[Player setting mode processing]
FIG. 117 shows a player setting mode process called in response to the calling command executed in the main process described above. In this modification, the processing shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the player setting mode processing shown in FIG. In the player setting mode process, it is determined whether or not there is a custom flag set in the above-described custom setting process, that is, whether or not the adjustment content by the player in the specific effect can be selected (step C761).

  When there is no custom flag (Step C761; N), the process proceeds to Step C588. If there is a custom flag (Step C761; Y), the CPU calls and executes a player custom setting process (Step C762), which is a process for enabling the player to select the adjustment content in the specific effect.

[Player custom setting process]
FIG. 118 shows a player custom setting process called in response to the calling command executed in the above-described player setting mode process. In this player custom setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the player custom setting is possible (step C771). In the player custom setting enabled state, the player custom setting item displayed as a selectable item in the present modification on the player setting mode screen is selected, and the selection screen as shown in FIG. 120 (b) is displayed. It is displayed.

  If the player custom setting is not possible (step C771; N), the player custom setting process ends. If it is in the player custom setting possible state (step C771; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an upward cursor operation as a process for selecting an item (step C772). The upward cursor operation is an operation of touching the upper area of the touch panel 29. If there is no upward cursor operation (step C772; N), the process moves to step C777. If the upward cursor operation has been performed (step C772; Y), the address of the player custom setting item area is prepared (step C773), and the set value of the player custom setting item after reaching the lower limit is prepared (step C773). Step C774). Then, a minus update process is performed (step C775), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C776). The minus update process is the process shown in FIG.

  On the player custom setting screen shown in FIG. 120 (b), values correspond to the items of “adjustment method 1”, “adjustment method 2”, “adjustment method 3”, “adjustment method 4”, and “return”. The items are arranged in ascending order of value from the top. Each time an upward cursor operation is performed, an item having a smaller corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves upward in the player custom setting screen. Also, if the upward cursor operation is performed in a state where the item with the smallest value is selected (when the cursor is located on the item displayed at the top on the custom setting screen), the item with the largest value is selected and the game is played. Cursor moves to the item displayed at the bottom of the user custom setting screen.

  Returning to FIG. 118, it is next determined whether or not a downward cursor operation has been performed (step C777). The downward cursor operation is an operation of touching the lower area of the touch panel 29. When there is no downward cursor operation (Step C777; N), the flow shifts to Step C783. If the downward cursor operation has been performed (step C777; Y), the address of the player custom setting item area is prepared (step C778), and the upper limit value of the player custom setting item is prepared (step C779). Then, a set value after reaching the upper limit is prepared (step C780). Then, a plus update process is performed (step C781), and custom setting information corresponding to the updated value is set (step C782). The plus update process is the process shown in FIG.

  Each time a downward cursor operation is performed, an item having a larger corresponding value is sequentially selected, and the cursor moves downward on the player custom setting screen. If the item with the largest value is selected (when the cursor is positioned on the item displayed at the bottom of the player custom setting screen), the item with the smallest value is selected. The cursor moves to the item displayed at the top on the player custom setting screen.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the fixing operation has been performed (step C783). The confirmation operation is an operation of touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 with the cursor positioned on any one of the items of “adjustment method 1”, “adjustment method 2”, “adjustment method 3”, and “adjustment method 4”. . If there is no such confirmation operation (step C783; N), the player custom setting process ends. Note that it is assumed that there is no operation for touching the left or right area of the touch panel 29 even when the cursor is located at the item of “return”, and there is no determination operation. If there is a confirmation operation (step C783; Y), it is determined whether the confirmation operation is an operation for selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784).

  The first flag is a flag for setting whether or not the first adjustment item can be adjusted. The fixing operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON is an adjustment method for enabling the adjustment of the first adjustment item. This is a case in which the adjustment operation is performed by selecting the adjustment method 1 or 2. If the operation is a finalizing operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; Y), the first flag is set to an ON state (a state in which the first adjustment item can be adjusted). Then, an ON setting process (step C785), which is a common process for setting the target flag, is called and executed, and the routine goes to step C787. If the item is not a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the first flag is set to ON (step C784; N), that is, if the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting the adjustment method 3 or 4, the first flag is set. In order to set an OFF state (a state where the adjustment of the first adjustment item cannot be performed), an OFF setting process (step C786), which is a common process for clearing a target flag, is called and executed, and the process proceeds to step C787.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the item is an operation for confirming selection of an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787). The second flag is a flag for setting whether or not the second adjustment item can be adjusted, and the final operation of selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON is an adjustment method for enabling the adjustment of the second adjustment item. This is a case where the adjustment operation is a selection operation by selecting the adjustment method 1 or 3. If the operation is a finalizing operation by selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; Y), the second flag is set to an ON state (a state in which the second adjustment item can be adjusted). Then, an ON setting process (step C788), which is a common process for setting a target flag, is called and executed, and then the player custom setting process ends. If the item is not a confirmation operation by selecting an item for which the second flag is set to ON (step C787; N), that is, if the operation is a confirmation operation by selecting the adjustment method 2 or 4, the second flag is set. In order to set an OFF state (a state where adjustment of the second adjustment item is not possible), an OFF setting process (step C789), which is a common process for clearing a target flag, is called and executed, and thereafter, a player custom setting process To end. That is, in the player custom setting process, the setting selected during the process is determined.

  In the custom setting process, not only whether or not the player can select the adjustment content in the specific effect, but also a selection method that can be selected by the player may be selected. For example, a setting may be made such that only adjustment methods 1 and 4 can be selected. Further, when the custom setting is invalidated so that the player cannot select the adjustment content in the specific effect, it may be possible to select which adjustment method to execute the specific effect.

(Specific production processing)
In the present modification, the specific effect processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the specific effect processing shown in FIG. In the specific effect processing, it is determined whether there is a first flag that is a flag indicating whether or not the first adjustment item can be adjusted (step C791). If the first flag is present (step C791; Y), that is, if the adjustment of the first adjustment item is possible, the process from step C712, which is the process of performing the adjustment corresponding to the first adjustment item, is performed. The first adjustment item here is an adjustment for reducing the force. A different value is set as the set value after the lower limit of the first meter has been reached, depending on the selected adjustment method. In the case of the adjustment method 1, since the adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower area of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the lower limit is the lower limit. On the other hand, in the case of the adjustment method 2, since the adjustment is performed only by operating the lower area of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the lower limit is set to 0 (reference value).

  If the first flag does not exist (step C791; N), that is, if the adjustment of the first adjustment item is not possible, the first meter concealed image information is not processed without performing the adjustment corresponding to the first adjustment item. Is set (step C792). The first adjustment item here is an adjustment for reducing the force, and the first meter concealment image conceals the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment for reducing the force as shown in FIGS. 114 (c) and (d). This is a concealed image 85. An image for indicating or notifying the special figure change display game displayed on the concealed image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

  Further, in the specific effect processing, it is determined whether or not there is a second flag which is a flag indicating whether or not the second adjustment item can be adjusted (step C793). If the second flag is present (step C793; Y), that is, if the adjustment of the second adjustment item is possible, the process from step C718, which is the process of performing the adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item, is performed. The second adjustment item here is an adjustment for increasing the force. A different value is set as the set value after the second meter reaches the upper limit value depending on the selected adjustment method. In the case of the adjustment method 1, since the adjustment is performed by operating the upper or lower area of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the upper limit is the upper limit. On the other hand, in the case of the adjustment method 3, since the adjustment is performed only by operating the upper region of the touch panel 29, the set value after reaching the upper limit value is set to 0 (reference value).

  If the second flag does not exist (step C793; N), that is, if the adjustment of the second adjustment item is not possible, the process for performing the adjustment corresponding to the second adjustment item is not performed, and the second meter hidden image information is not executed. Is set (step C794). The second adjustment item here is an adjustment to increase the force, and the second meter concealment image hides the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment to increase the force as shown in FIGS. 114 (b) and (d). This is a concealed image 85. An image for indicating or notifying the special figure change display game displayed on the concealed image 85 may be set here, or an image selected in a separate process may be arranged.

  In addition, the operation of decreasing the value is enabled for the first meter, and the operation of increasing the value is enabled for the second meter, but is not limited thereto. The change in the value may be in any direction as long as the change operation of the first meter and the second meter can be performed independently. Therefore, both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter may increase the value. In this case, the same subroutine is called for the common processing. The process can be called, and only the plus update process can be called in the specific effect process. Similarly, even if both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter decrease the value, only the minus update process can be called in the specific effect process.

  Further, the change in the value inside the control device due to the operation and the change in the performance need not necessarily match. For example, the value inside the control device may increase with the operation, but the force may decrease in the effect. With this configuration, for example, both the operation on the first meter and the operation on the second meter can perform an update that increases the value inside the control device. In the specific effect processing, only the plus update processing is performed. Can be called. Of course, only the minus update process may be called as the value in the control device decreases. The effect change can be set to either increase or decrease by setting the association with the value inside the control device.

  Further, other adjustment items can be assigned as the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. For example, as shown in FIG. 121, a ball hitting direction may be assigned as a first adjustment item, and a ball hitting force may be assigned as a second adjustment item. For items for which adjustment is not possible, "AUTO" may be displayed assuming that the gaming machine automatically adjusts. This display is performed by one or both of the concealment display and the explanation display 81.

  In the custom setting, whether or not the adjustment item can be selected for the specific effect is set, but other contents may be selectable. Further, in the player custom setting, the adjustment item is selected, but other contents may be selectable. For example, in the custom setting or the player custom setting, the attribute of the character appearing in the specific effect can be selected, and a flag corresponding to the selection may be set in the ON processing or the OFF processing. The dialogue A of the character may be displayed, and when the option B is selected, the dialogue B of the character may be displayed. Further, in the custom setting or the player custom setting, the character appearing in the specific effect can be selected, and a flag corresponding to the selection may be set in the ON setting processing or the OFF setting processing. Further, although the ON setting process and the OFF setting process are separate processes called by different calling instructions, they may be collectively performed as one process called by one calling command.

  FIG. 122 shows the relationship between the control processes described above. The first control process corresponds to the main process (FIG. 112) in the effect control device 300, and the second control process called in response to the first call command executed in the first control process is a player setting mode process. (FIG. 117). Further, the third control processing called in response to the second call instruction executed in the first control processing corresponds to the specific effect processing (FIG. 119), and corresponds to the third call instruction executed in the second control processing. The fourth control process that is called up corresponds to the player volume adjustment process (FIG. 82) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (FIG. 83).

  Further, a fifth control process called in response to a fourth call command executed in the third control process and the fourth control process, and a fifth call command executed in the third control process and the fourth control process are executed. The sixth control process called corresponds to the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 84). Whether the fourth control instruction and the fifth control instruction are executed in the third control processing and the fifth control processing and the sixth control processing are called corresponds to the sixth control instruction executed in the second control processing. This can be determined in accordance with the seventh control process (the player custom setting process (FIG. 118)) called up. In the seventh control process, whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction can be executed may be determined, or whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction may be executed integrally may be determined. Is also good.

  An eighth control process called in response to a seventh call command executed in the first control process corresponds to a hole setting mode process (FIG. 115), and an eighth control process includes a fourth call command and a fifth call command. By executing the command, it is possible to call the minus update process (FIG. 84) or the plus update process (FIG. 84) as the fifth control process and the sixth control process. Further, whether the sixth control instruction is executed and the seventh control processing is called in the second control processing is determined by a ninth control processing (customized) corresponding to the eighth call instruction executed in the eighth control processing. It can be determined in accordance with the setting process (FIG. 116).

  The seventh control process and the ninth control process can execute the ninth call command and the tenth call command to call the ON setting process or the OFF setting process, which are the tenth control process and the eleventh control process. is there. The group for defining registers to be used for the tenth control processing and the eleventh control processing may be the same group as the fifth control processing and the sixth control processing, or may be an upper or lower group. Is also good.

  Based on the above, the control means for performing a game-related control in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result ( Effect control device 300), and the control means executes the first control process, the second control process called in response to the first call instruction executed in the first control process, and the first control process. A third control process called in response to the second call instruction, a fourth control process called in response to the third call instruction executed in the second control process, a third control process and a fourth control process. And a fifth control process called in response to the fourth call instruction to be executed. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  The control means may be capable of executing a sixth control process called in response to a fifth call instruction executed in the third control process and the fourth control process. Therefore, each control process can be independently developed, and the development efficiency can be improved. Further, the relationship between the respective control processes becomes clear, and the state of the argument and the return value can be easily grasped, so that the development efficiency can be improved.

  The control means may determine whether to execute the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction in the third control processing according to a seventh control processing called in response to a sixth call instruction executed in the second control processing. Can be determined. Therefore, the availability of a call instruction executed by one control process can be controlled by another control process, so that each control process can be independently developed and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the specification can be changed without changing the relationship between the control processes, and it is not necessary to change the state of the argument and the return value, and the development efficiency can be improved. In the seventh control process, whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction can be executed may be determined, or whether or not the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction may be executed integrally may be determined. Is also good.

  The control means can execute an eighth control process called in response to a seventh call instruction executed in the first control process, and the eighth control process executes the fourth call instruction and the fifth call instruction. Executable, and it is possible to determine whether the sixth call instruction is executed in the second control process in accordance with the tenth control process called in response to the ninth call instruction executed in the eighth control process. It will be. Therefore, the availability of a call instruction executed by one control process can be controlled by another control process, so that each control process can be independently developed and development efficiency can be improved. In addition, the specification can be changed without changing the relationship between the control processes, and it is not necessary to change the state of the argument and the return value, and the development efficiency can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 123, the increase operation and the decrease operation may be performed separately for each of the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item. In this example, the first adjustment item can be increased and decreased by operating the right and left regions of the touch panel 29, and the second adjustment item can be increased and decreased by operating the upper and lower regions of the touch panel 29. I can do it. In this case, as shown in FIG. 123A, the meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment in the direction corresponding to the first adjustment item extends in the left-right direction corresponding to the arrangement of the operation portion of the touch panel 29. The meter display 82 corresponding to the adjustment of the force corresponding to the second adjustment item may extend in the up-down direction corresponding to the arrangement of the operation portion of the touch panel 29.

  When only the first adjustment item can be adjusted, “(AUTO)” is displayed on the meter display 82 corresponding to the second adjustment item, as shown in FIG. 123 (b). Further, a concealed image is also displayed in the explanation portion corresponding to the second adjustment item in the operation explanation display 83. In this case, in the image showing the operation portion of the touch panel 29, the display indicating the position of the upper and lower areas where the operation is disabled is maintained but may be deleted. Further, the description display 81 displays "(AUTO)" after "Chikara" which is the second adjustment item.

  Similarly, when only the second adjustment item can be adjusted, "(AUTO)" is displayed on the meter display 82, the operation explanation display 83, and the explanation display 81 as shown in FIG. Also, “(AUTO)” is displayed over the arrow indicating the direction in which the ball is hit. When the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item cannot be adjusted, “(AUTO)” is displayed in a portion corresponding to both adjustment items as shown in FIG.

  When there is an adjustment item that cannot be adjusted, if a concealment display that conceals all the corresponding portions on both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 is performed, a sense of oppression appears. The operation description display 83 is referred to as a concealment display for concealing all of the corresponding portions to make the operation less likely to be mistaken, and the meter display 82 has only the character display of “(AUTO)” so that there is no feeling of oppression. Like that. Of course, both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83 may perform a concealment display for concealing all of the corresponding parts, or only the meter display 82 may perform a concealment display for concealing all of the corresponding parts. In the explanation display 83, only the character “(AUTO)” may be displayed, or only the character display “(AUTO)” may be displayed in both the meter display 82 and the operation explanation display 83.

(Specific production processing)
As shown in FIG. 123, when the increase operation and the decrease operation are performed separately for the first adjustment item and the second adjustment item, the specific effect processing illustrated in FIG. 119 is replaced with the specific effect processing illustrated in FIG. 124. The specified effect processing shown is performed. In this specific effect processing, when there is a first flag (step C791; Y), processing relating to an operation of lowering the first meter corresponding to the first adjustment item (steps C712 to C716) and corresponding to the first adjustment item The processing related to the operation of raising the first meter (steps C718 to C722) is performed.

  If the first flag is present (step C791; Y), first, the contents of the first meter area are loaded (step C801), and the first meter display information corresponding to the value before the update is set (step C801). C802). In this example, the adjusted value is saved without initializing when the specific effect ends, and the adjustment result of the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of the new specific effect by this process. The Rukoto. If the adjusted value is initialized when the specific effect ends, the specific effect always starts from the reference value at the start of the specific effect.

  Similarly, when the second flag is present (step C793; Y), the process related to the operation of lowering the second meter corresponding to the second adjustment item (steps C712 to C716) and the second adjustment item The processing related to the operation of raising the corresponding second meter (steps C718 to C722) is performed.

  When the second flag is present (Step C793; Y), first, the contents of the second meter area are loaded (Step C804), and the second meter display information corresponding to the value before the update is set (Step C804). C805). In this example, the adjusted value is saved without initializing when the specific effect ends, and the adjustment result of the previous specific effect is set and displayed at the start of the new specific effect by this process. The Rukoto.

  Next, a description will be given of a process in a case where the adjustment of the volume or luminance using the operation of the touch panel 29 and the specific effect overlap. FIG. 125 shows an example in which a specific effect is started when the player is operating the touch panel 29 to adjust the volume and brightness. In this example, the volume and brightness can be adjusted by operating the touch panel 29 by the player even during the execution of the special figure change display game.

  In FIG. 125 (a), a volume and brightness adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, and an adjustment display 89 which is a display indicating the volume and brightness is performed on the display device 41. The volume adjustment is increased by operating the upper area of the touch panel 29, and is decreased by operating the lower area. The adjustment of the brightness is increased by operating the right area of the touch panel 29 and is decreased by operating the left area.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (b), the specific effect has been started while the adjustment display 89 is being performed. In this example, the operation of decreasing the force, which is the first adjustment item, is enabled by operating the lower region of the touch panel 29. This operation overlaps with the operation of decreasing the volume. FIGS. 125 (c) to (e) show examples of a case where an operation in the lower area of the touch panel 29 which is an overlapping operation in such a situation is performed.

  The example shown in FIG. 125 (c) is an example in which both the value reduction and the volume reduction in the specific effect are performed. The example shown in FIG. 125D is an example in which only the volume is reduced. The example shown in FIG. 125 (e) is an example in which only the value reduction in the specific effect is performed. Any of these aspects can be taken. Further, during the execution of the specific effect, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness may be disabled.

  If there is an operation in the upper area of the touch panel 29 that is a non-overlapping operation, the volume is increased. In addition, when there is an operation in the left and right areas of the touch panel 29 which is a non-overlapping operation, the brightness is increased or decreased. However, in a case where the volume and brightness are not adjusted when an overlapped operation is performed (for example, in the case of FIG. 125 (e)), the volume and brightness are not adjusted even when a non-overlapping operation is performed. The adjustment may not be performed.

  Further, in this example, the meter display 82 of the specific effect and the volume and brightness adjustment display 89 have the same display mode, but may have different display modes. For example, the number of scales of the meter display 82 may be different from that of the adjustment display 89 of the volume and brightness, or the color saturation and brightness of the scale of the meter display 82 and the adjustment display 89 may be different. In addition, the operation of the touch panel 29 used for the specific effect and the operation of the touch panel 29 used for adjusting the volume and brightness may not overlap.

  It should be noted that the number of scales of the adjustment display 89 for volume adjustment and the adjustment display 89 for brightness adjustment are not only the same, but also different numbers of scales (for example, the volume is 10 and the luminance is 3; the volume is 20) And the luminance is set to 10 scales). In addition, a predetermined sound (for example, changing to Doremifasoraside remi when increasing, and the opposite of increasing when decreasing) may be output according to the increase or decrease of the scale in the volume and luminance. Although the predetermined sound is output at the changed volume (volume that changes in real time), when the luminance is increased or decreased, the predetermined sound may be output at a volume corresponding to the current volume (the volume set before the luminance adjustment). Further, the display mode of the scale (color, transmittance, direction, etc. of the scale) may be different for volume adjustment and brightness adjustment. Such an adjustment display 89 is also applicable to the hall setting screen and the player setting screen shown in FIG.

  In addition, the first or second flag is set to ON or OFF in the player custom setting process that can be executed when the game is in the customer waiting state. The setting of turning on or off the first flag or the second flag may be performed even in a state other than the waiting state. By doing so, the degree of freedom for changing the settings is increased, and the game content can be tailored to the needs of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. For example, in the setting of waiting for customers, we chose not to perform the operation in the specific production, but in the production performed until the specific production, the production with high expectation such as intense heat was performed The player's request for the operation can be satisfied.

  As an operation for performing such a setting, the first flag and the second flag are turned on by performing an operation different from increasing or decreasing the meter display 82, for example, by pressing and holding the effect button 25 during a specific effect. Is also good. When the first flag and the second flag are changed to ON, the concealment image 85 is in the way of the meter display 82, so it is better to delete it. The explanation display 81 may be a display when the character “(AUTO)” is not displayed, the character “(AUTO)” may be left as it is, or the character “(AUTO)” may be deleted, and then “((AUTO)” may be deleted. The display may be such that the portion where "AUTO)" was displayed is a bug-eating state in which the display is blank (only "(AUTO)" is erased), or a second concealed image concealing "(AUTO)" is displayed. You may. Conversely, the first flag and the second flag may be turned off by performing an operation different from increasing or decreasing the meter display 82, such as holding down the effect button 25 during the specific effect. In this case, it is desirable to display the concealed image or the image of “(AUTO)”, but it may be displayed as it is.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as described in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, but includes, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using gaming balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combinations.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 300 effect control device (control means)
311 CPU (arithmetic processing means)
322 RAM (storage means)

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
A control unit for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Arithmetic processing means having a plurality of registers;
Storage means capable of storing information related to control,
When one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed in another control process, a return value returned by the one control process to the other control process is stored in the register. when doing so, the return value according to a predetermined order to each of a plurality of said register and said store to Rukoto.

In addition, a control means (effect control device) that controls a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. 300), and the control means includes: an arithmetic processing means (CPU 311) having a plurality of registers; and a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information relating to control, wherein one control processing is performed by another control processing. When one control process stores a return value to be returned to another control process in a register when the relationship is called corresponding to a call instruction executed in advance, a predetermined value is stored in each of the plurality of registers. stores the return value in accordance with order, if there is a predetermined number or more return values, stores a predetermined number less than the return value according to ranking for a plurality of registers, a predetermined number or more return values The fact that so as to store the 憶 means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with an increase in the return value.

Further, the control means includes a storage means (RAM 322) capable of storing information related to control, and when there are more than a predetermined number of arguments, the plurality of registers store less than a predetermined number of arguments according to the order, This means that more than two arguments are stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to cope with an increase in the return value.

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
A control unit for controlling the game,
The control means includes:
Arithmetic processing means having a plurality of registers;
Storage means capable of storing information related to control,
When one control process is called in response to a call instruction executed in another control process, a return value returned by the one control process to the other control process is stored in the register. In this case, storing the return value according to a predetermined order in each of the plurality of registers,
When there are a predetermined number or more of the return values, the return values of up to the predetermined number are stored in the plurality of registers according to the order, and the return values of the predetermined number or more are stored in the storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by that: The control means includes:
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the order is set in the order of a code assigned to identify each of the plurality of registers.